-------
Table B-54. Observed MCTT Influent Pesticide Concentrations (ug/L)
Sample
estimatec
874
908
936
964
992
1020
1048
1097
1287
1315
1403
1512
1621
876
910
938
966
994
1022
1050
1099
1289
1317
1405
1514
1623
Storm Event
J MDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
' '" 7
8
9
~10
11
12
13
Chamber
C
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
P
F
F
alpha-BHC
8
14
gamma-BHC
3
18
23
heptachlor
7
11
. _..
9
beta-BHC
2
12
17
24
31
6
35
12
12
11
10
3
17
9
10
11
18
5
29
8
5
7
4
delta-BHC
9
17
aldrin
48
530
197
82
96
133
49
941
140
284
656
181
59
105
626
146
85
68
97
838
102
512
979
89
33
65
heptachlor epoxide
11
20
15
endosulfan I
15
37
4,4'-DDE
26
- - -
~.
Cd
Continued
-------
Table B-54. Continued
CO
LH
ON
Sample
estimated
874
908
936
964
992
1020
1048
1097
1287
1315
1403
1512
1621
876
910
938
966
994
1022
1050
1099
1289
1317
1405
1514
1623
Storm Event
dDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Chamber
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
/
F
F
F
F
dieldrin
12
169
140
49
23
121
170
55
112
154
26
171
103
56
72
35
61
103
110
35
endrin
26
39
42
46
48
37
67
36
26
35
29
32
37
40
50
29
4,4'-DDD
7
142
52
21
45
32
139
104
95
185
103
49
20
143
45
26
49
28
114
94
91
201
89
48
15
eridosulfan II
5
6
_ . _
8
4,4'-DDT
31
139
152
60
51
113
68
35
66
108
61
31
39
endrin aldehyde
47
endosulfan sulfate
8
47
28
9
35
44
12
75
83
104
85
98
27
29
16
11
36
11
20
13
13
11
15
10
12
melhoxychlor
39
170
51
41
138
186
296
330
335
251
181
92
113
40
121
92
endrin ketone
7
11
8
25
11
17
19
17
18
15
17
10
7
88
20
9
37
7
17
,72
40
28
-------
Table B-55. Observed Pesticide Concentrations after Grit Chamber and before Main Settling Chamber
CO
Sample
Storm Event
e»Umated MDL (ng/L)
877
911
939
967
995
1023
1051
1100
1290
1318
1406
1515
1624
900
913
941
969
997
1025
1053
1102
1292
1320
1408
1517
1626
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Chamber
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
I)
II
II
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N "
N
F
f
F
F
F
F
F
F"
F
F
F
F
F
alpha-BHC
8
13
17
8
11
gamma-BHC
3
24
4
heptachlor
_ _ ._
. .. _
8
- • •"
.
12
8
tote-BHC
2
8
10
13
22
7
31
9
5
4
6
12
11
12
25
3
31
8
16
3
4
detta-BHC
9
aldrin
48
515
165
104
98
113
83
843
84
299
148
108
53
138
832
184
100
80
111
841
611
747
117
60
heptachlor epoxide
11
- -
endosulfan I
15
15
-- -
4.4'-DDE
26
Continued
-------
Table B-55. Continued
to
i!/<
CO
Sample
estimated
877
911
939
967
995
1023
1051
1100
1290
1318 "
1406
1515
1624
900
913
941
969
997
1025
1053
1102
1292
1320
1408
1517
1626
Storm Event
WDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Chamber
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II ""
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N "
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F "
F
F
F
F
F
F
dieldrin
12
203
92
60
25
63
156
50
107
26
232
131
66
27
112
115
53
136
117
38
endrin
26
41
37
57
44
49
38
39
41
._.
39
35
41
50
56
37
4,4'-DDD
7
112
37
27
49
28
129
108
108
208
114
41
22
125
52
29
47
31
133
100
105
234
105
42
17
endosulfan II
5
----- - -
4,4'-DDT
31
99
79
-
92
73
93
56
endrin aldehyde
47
endosulfan sulfate
8
77
27
24
47
8
75
83
103
102
100
26
37
8
10
41
11
21
15
17
50
19
11
11
methoxychlor
39
337
48
225
303
326
438
95
225
78
40
108
109
218
126
endrin ketone
7
16
11
8
94
11
21
7
18
23
15
14
18
10
9
79
17
10
44
19
79
41
28
-------
Table B-56. Observed Pesticide Concentrations after Main Settling Chamber and before Final MCTT Chamber (ng/L)
00
Sample
•stimate
879
914
950
970
998
1026
1026
1054
1103
1293
1321
1518
1627
881
916
952
972
1000
1028
1028
1056
1105
1295
1323
1520
1629
Storm Event
A MDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
Chamber
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
II
III
II
II
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
-
F
r
F
~
alpha-BHC
8
16
667
785
14
14
18
16
gamma-BHC
i
1938
2305
48
54
heptachlor
7
1710
1828
44
46
beta-BHC
2
15
9
10
22
5
1927
2092
10
9
7
9
15
7
9
17
6
39
40
7
8
3
9
delta-BHC
9
1250
1451
46
48
aldrin
48
501
60
66
52
2672
3122
131
72
60
600
58
53
51
70
117
133
170
30
101
80
heptachlor epoxide
11
4633
5339
119
123
endosulfan I
15
4147
5173
129
132
- -
4,4'-DDE
26
7448
8288
135
142
Continued
-------
Table B-56. Continued
td
ON
o
Sample
estimated
879
914
950
970
998
1026
1026
1054
1103
1293
1321
1518
1627
881
916
952
972
1000
1028
1028
1056
1105
1295
1323
1520
1629
Storm Event
MDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
Chamber
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
111
III
III
III
III
III
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
dieldrin
12
161
21
35
7027
7833
47
36
146
29
43
162
194
80
21
26
30
endrin
26
40
8755
44
10082
36
57
58
32
42
184
58
199
36
63
62
38
4,4'-DDD
7
90
20
17
36
8
4398
5084
98
21
38
48
19
13
102
21
14
39
19
146
153
130
22
125
148
33
17
endosulfan II
5
3393
4258
144
149
...
4,4'-DDT
31
1801
1769
61
113
104
endrin aldehyde
47
2900
3531
79
99
endosulfan sulfale
8
38
12
15
18
6459
6980
53
29
62
60
10
31
13
26
9
141
142
22
89
13
10
13
methoxychlor
39
124
2797
2776
204
143
283
225
96
51
73
56
103
79
107
97
171
81
123
endrin ketone
7
16
7
9
79
3741
4498
7
23
35
40
53
23
12
7
63
5
159
175
8
35
5
13
-------
Table B-57. Observed Pesticide Concentrations in MCTT Effluent (ug/L)
CO
Ox
Sample
estimate!
8B2
917
953
973
1001
1029
1029
1057
1106
1296
1324
1412
1630
901
919
955
975
1003
1031
1031
1059
1108
1296
1328
1414
1832
Storm Event
J MDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
6
9
10
11
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
Chamber
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
alpha-BHC
8
9
13
15
10
23
23
12
gamma-BHC
3
58
68
75
76
heplachlor
7
49
57
—
66
63
beta-BHC
2
10
9
g
18
5
46
55
9
6
6
8
15
7
10
10
11
22
6
56
55
10
8
6
9
9
8
delta-BHC
9
65
76
63
65
aldrin jheptachlor epoxide
48
135
163
66
145
152
68
11
222
265
177
177
endosulfan I
15
249
296
191
193
4,4'-DDE
26
308
386
218
215
Continued
-------
Table B-57. Continued
CO
Sample
estimated
882
917
953
973
1001
1029
1029
1057
1106
1296
1324
1412
1630
901
919
955
975
1003
1031
1031
1059
1108
1298
1326
1414
1632
Storm Event
dDL (ng/L)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
Chamber
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
IV
Filtered
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
dieldrin
12
293
383
238
254
23
endrln
26
29
388
32
492
32
35
32
40
283
31
283
32
32
4,4'-DDD
7
24
14
9
28
10
309
370
63
23
17
24
30
9
28
14
7
30
12
224
228
70
66
52
76
43
11
endosulfan II
5
287
336
221
225
4,4'-DDT
31
247
274
39
192
163
37
endrin aldehyde
47
188
226
155
164
endosulfan sulfate
8
297
349
18
12
38
20
14
9
10
228
220
18
9
9
8
8
methoxychlor
39
63
350
378
68
164
37
77
62
234
184
65
76
endrin ketone
7
19
62
326
362
41
43
41
21
20
33
37
247
240
7
17
11
11
12
7
-------
Appendix C
Source Area Pollutant Observations
C-l
-------
Table C-l. Roof Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
1-Resid. Roof
7-Apt. Roof
23-Resid. Roof
24-Resid. Roof
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexacnloroethane
Naphthalene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
70
92
0.4
6.6
12
3.8
59
23
14
12
10
10
9
9
14
82
14
3.4
11
46
0.9
620
30
40
170
70
7.9
1580
Filtered
86
98
0.4
230
0.3
2.3
1550
Non-
filtered
23
24
7.0
17
8.9
46
42
39
36
32
30
28
23
21
55
147
6.4
12
34
0.5
8370
0.68
30
170
30
60
Filtered
55
65
17
1550
1.3
46
Non-
filtered
2
15
6.7
3
1
25
16
11
10
9
9
8
8
80
0.57
10
20
3.1
4.4
140
Filtered
15
26
6.4
2.6
140
Non-
filtered
11
29
5.9
92
5.5
69
45
35
18
16
14
11
8
380
0.32
10
3.2
30
395
Filtered
31
48
8.7
0.18
8.7
250
C-2
-------
Table C-l. Roof Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
25-Resid. Roof
10-Car Service
Roof
31-Com. Roof
34-Com. Roof
Microtox Toxicity
110 (c/o light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol ) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
40
46
6.0
10
2
17
15
13
11
11
10
10
9
31
120
0.19
10
1.5
10
3.6
210
Filtered
37
40
16
0.13
1.1
210
Non-
filtered
34
40
7.2
1
1.2
84
67
Filtered
39
45
38
22
16 :
10 ;
8
5
87
88
68
56
187
22
24
105
45
28
16
73
266
221
300
0.3
17
23
13
4.8
270 : 75
510
1.7
1.3
410 250
Non-
filtered
19
19
4.4
<1
7.3
84
58
32
15
9
8
7
5
25
0.95
13
80
2.6
110
Filtered
35
36
11
0.13
1.6
110
Non-
filtered
25
29
7.0
7
1.5
27
21
11
5
5
4
4
3
160
0.28
5.3
70
23
Filtered
33
33
160
23
C-3
-------
Table C-l. Roof Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
14-lndus. Roof
49- Indus. Flat
Roof
52- Indus. Flat
Roof
58- Indus. Flat
Roof
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
0
3
7.3
11
8.9
58
16
9
7
7
6
6
5
20
48
15
28
12
52
0.7
1.1
0.7
2.2
380
1.4
900
80
15
Filtered
16
17
21
14
30
1.7
15
Non-
filtered
13
16
8.4
6
3.5
53
42
27
21
18
17
16
15
322
1.5
5
10
5.7
4.9
87
Filtered
17
22
322
0.6
51
Non-
filtered
30
35
8.2
2
2
16
14
12
11
10
10
9
8
7.6
420
1.0
10
30
50
5.4
11
Filtered
13
21
162
0.52
1.4
9
Non-
filtered
21
26
8.2
1
1.5
17
14
8
6
6
6
5
5
154
1.0
9.1
20
15
5.3
21
Filtered
25
29
154
0.68
3.7
1.1
12
C-4
-------
Table C-2. Parking Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlbrobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
D->
Non-
filtered
61
66
7.3
22
17
52
40
32
27
25
23
22
18
9.6
1
1
1.8
1.4
3420
70
310
440
3.3
88
\pt.
Filtered
45
49
0.2
1110
0.3
2.8
1.5
88
f
Non-
filtered
8
9
6.9
9
14
52
45
38
32
28
27
24
20
33
81
41
94
80
55
29
132
11
78
20
0.3
1580
0.5
270
130
130
70
40
i-Apt.
Filtered
26
27
4.8
19
110
1.3
23
2
Non-
filtered
9
19
6.7
27
7.7
57
42
30
25
23
22
19
17
217
47
10
8
21
0.8
780
10
40
60
130
60
30
-Inst.
Filtered
27
37
230
0.2
25
9
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.5
52
7.9
62
51
36
28
26
23
20
17
15
60
102
41
72
13
21
16
40
16
18
42
20
1.2
130
0.72
5.9
12
30
30
•Com.
Filtered
38
41
17
6.6
130
1.2
14
C-5
-------
Table C-2. Parking Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ug/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
16-lnst.
Non-
filtered
29
35
8.5
750
720
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
24
22500
>2.4
770
130
20
150
Unpaved
Filtered
13
13
120
2.4
2.6
1.2
23
2
Ur
Non-
filtered
7
22
8.0
32
63
44
41
38
33
30
29
28
25
620
0.25
10
1
40
13
7-lnst.
i paved
Filtered
4
20
620
2.0
13
29-ln
Non-
filtered
9
10
7.4
181
67
9
9
8
8
8
7
7
6
6480
0.24
30
30
30
10
24
st. Paved
Filtered
16
16
480
2.7
18
3(
Non-
filtered
9
14
7.2
69
8
59
47
37
29
26
24
21
17
880
0.39
5.2
10
29
50
25
)-Com.
Filtered
29
29
32
0.10
1.6
23
C-6
-------
Table C-2. Parking Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
37-Com. Paved
44-Com.
Paved
S1-Com.
Paved
S2-Com.
Paved
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (|ig/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
8
8
7.7
67
8.8
66
54
46
39
36
33
29
24
1530
1.5
25
30
70
50
95
Filtered
9
10
34
9.2
1.6
14
Non-
filtered
11
16
8.2
14
4.2
59
39
18
15
14
13
12
10
390
2.6
60
5.6
4.2
12
Filtered
22
33
91
0.23
1.3
7
Non-
filtered
34
48
5.6
50
20
47
42
39
36
34
33
32
28
>222
1.6
4.6
70
31
28
277,
Filtered
30
43
222
1.2
2.0
31
2.1
3.2
259
Non-
filtered
65
72
0.25
5.9
22
4.8
73
47
30
23
21
19
18
17
271
0.63
11
33
39
5.4
308
Filtered
55
61
0.23
14
0.46
1.1
22
2.0
2.6
253
C-7
-------
Table C-2. Parking Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,l) perlene
Pesticides Detected
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Methoxychlor
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
S3-Cor
Non-
filtered
47
60
0.65
5.7
27
2.0
53
46
39
34
33
31
29
26
0.3
262
3.4
5.0
99
29
67
647
n. Paved
Filtered
35
58
0.38
<5
1.8
5.0
61
5.2
13
558
3£
U
Non-
filtered
22
22
7.7
457
57
51
50
48
44
41
38
35
31
4290
0.11
4.5
20
60
130
27
-Indus.
npaved
Filtered
11
14
2890
2.1
7.9
1.4
27
41
U
Non-
filtered
18
26
8.7
39
62
43
41
39
35
32
30
28
24
4840
1
11
10
14
70
30
l-lndus.
npaved
Filtered
23
29
100
0.47
1.8
1.2
6
56
U
Non-
filtered
15
19
7.4
13
8.1
49
45
41
37
34
32
29
25
303
1.9
3.8
10
10
20
28
-Indus.
npaved
Filtered
22
22
303
1.0
3.1
1.1
2.5
24
-------
Table C-3. Storage Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
43-Com.
46-Com.
13-lndus.
Unpaved
51 -Indus.
Microtox Toxicity
11 0(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction) ,
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl fiexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
0.2
8
8.1
17
3.5
76
58
34
20
17
16
14
10
31
180
2.2
7.5
10
50
60
29
Filtered
0
0
54
0.72
1.6
14
Non-
filtered
21
26
7.7 !
7
6.1
48
31
24
20
18
18
17
16
<5
16
3.7
10
3.6
1.9
103
Filtered
8
15
•
<5
1.6
1.3
1.8
103
Non-
filtered
36
36
7.6
453
260
7
7
6
6
5
5
5
4
16
4.5
8 __[
1.1
6990
2.4
340
300
310
60
290 |
Filtered
57
57
14
37
1.7
9
Non-
filtered
100
100
0.1
11.6
21
21
68
53
46
38
35
32
28
23
1360
10
90
30
9.4
30
12
Filtered
100
100
0.1
744
1.3
8.1
1
1.6
C-9
-------
Table C-3. Storage Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
53-lndus.
Unpaved
54-lndus.
Unpaved RR
ROW
55-lndus.
Unpaved
S6-Junkyard
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (|ig/L)
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
36
38
9.0
254
119
31
30
28
25
23
23
22
18
6040
3.2
20
120
330
90
260
Filtered
11
8
<5
0.42
1.1
5.7
8
Non-
filtered
9
10
7.9
10
12
31
29
25
23
21
20
18
17
590
0.91
60
10
30
20
25
Filtered
8
6
10
0.42
1.7
1.5
1.6
6
Non-
filtered
49
45
10.0
5
2.4
16
15
13
11
10
10
10
9
480
10
69
30
8.4
7.9
21
Filtered
67
68
0.6
182
0.27
32
1
2.5
2
Non-
filtered
100
100
0.02
6.5
38
15
55
49
47
40
38
36
34
30
29
584
17
12
1830
99
167
13100 '
Filtered
100
100
0.07
33
10
12
1520
3.5
87
13
C-10
-------
Table C-4. Street Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (u,g/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
26-R
Non-
filtered
0
19
6.9
7
3.3
67
51
34
26
22
20
17
16
70
0.35
2.8
10
30
3.3
58
esid.
Filtered
12
30
18
0.10
1.3
1.7
3.9
58
42
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.4
22
7.6
82
55
26
16
15
14
13
11
305
292
0.56
3.2
10
1.5
1.2
17
School
Filtered
0
I 0
292
0.51
0.97
1.5
3
A
Non-
filtered
27
32
8.0
94
64
20
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
5.4
0.6
1
10040
0.40
30
1250
150
2.8
130
Indus.
Filtered
45
48
3.3
05
0.7
4380
0.20
2.7
2.1
76
15
Non-
filtered
33
36
7.4
52
83
38
36
34
31
29
27
25
21
15
14
15
19
0.8
3880
220
360
30
80
-Indus.
Filtered
10
10
50
2.9
6
C-ll
-------
Table C-4. Street Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (jig/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
40-1
Non-
filtered
33
37
7.7
105
42
26
25
22
19
18
17
16
15
4020
1.3
10
20
40
70
56
ndus.
Filtered
43
43
410
0.16
1.3
11
1.5
23
50
Non-
filtered
22
32
8.4
11
3.3
51
42
36
31
29
27
24
21
>151
1.0
3.3
10
5.0
6.3
>4
-Indus.
Filtered
10
17
151
0.57
2.0
1.1
4
C-12
-------
Table C-5. Loading Dock Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
135 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
38-I
Non-
filtered
12
17
7.1
47
18
55
52
49
44
41
39
35
29
1
810
2.4
2.4
15
60
4.2
79
idus.
Filtered
21
21
18
0.56
15
1.3
62
47
Non-
filtered
31
36
8.3
34
7
46
25
20
17
16
16
14
13
590
1.2
8.9
20
80
8.1
31
-Indus.
Filtered
28
35
<5
0.48
4
57
Non-
filtered
31
37
8.0
39
25
82
55
26
16
15
14
13
11
930
0.73
40
30
25
7.8
<1
-Indus.
Filtered
9
9
<5
0.28
2.6
2.3
C-13
-------
Table C-6. Vehicle Service Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
C-Gas Station
5-Car Service
8-Car Wash
45-Auto Serv.
Stor.
Microtox Toxicity
110 ("Alight decrease)
I36 (% light decrease)
EC 50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
1 0% larger (by vol.) than;
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals detected (ng/L)
8is(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylerte
Fluorene
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum \
Cadmium j
Chromium !
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.8
22
11
84
59
46
23
20
18
17
15
6
0.8
1340 I
30 j
320
6.6 i
90
60
83
Filtered
0
0
4.9
n/a
0.2 j
6.3
83
Non-
filtered
32
49
7.3
17
12
47
42
37
33
29
27
25
22
72
161
37
53
38
39
25
107
15
60
0.8
1370
1.7 i
30 I
580 t
110
10
130
Filtered
40
46
410
1.1
13
Non-
filtered
10
16
7.3
38
2.6
64
48
30
22
18
17
16
13
45
65
74
57
104
11
44
47
25
51
31
90
103
120
230
10
2.4
1.5
60
70
50
Filtered
14
20
23
47
53
82
11
16
6.8
7.4
200
23
Non-
filtered
5
9
8.1
22
4.8
31
17
12
10
10
10
9
8
490
2.1
8.1
10
30
7.9
30
Filtered
0
3
63
0.34
2.1
1.4
11
C-14
-------
Table C-6. Vehicle Service Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
S4-Car Service
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Chlordane
Methoxychlor
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
44
49
5.3
20
21
66
63
60
57
55
54
52
47
0.3
93
2.4
11
76
27
62
234
Filtered
45
50
<5
0.50
2.5
24
3.4
31
234
C-15
-------
Table C-7. Landscaped Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations
E-Park
41-Resid.
Lawn
17-lnst. Grass
28-lnst. Grass
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
8
10
6.4
12
62
50
37
33
28
26
25
23
21
4.5
0.7
2920
2.2
50
70
83
Filtered
4
11
1860
1.5
1.7
83
Non-
filtered
18
23
6.4
10
13
50
35
30
25
24
23
20
17
180
1.0
110
4
1.7
30
32
Filtered
39
47
120
1.0
1.6
0.94
1.7
32
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.2
11
6
49
44
39
36
31
28
25
22
56
54
85
12
49
28
20
128
38
8.2
54
30
61
54
2090
0.04
100
110
1.4
130
24
Filtered
0
0
810
3.6
24
Non-
filtered
0
12
7
81
64
37
36
33
29
27
25
24
22
1770
0.32
10
10
9.4
30
18
Filtered
6
21
1650
1.4
2.0
18
C-16
-------
Table C-7. Landscaped Area Runoff Sheetflow Quality Observations (Continued)
B-lndus. Grass
S5-lndus.
Sidewalk
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 , 3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Pesticides Detected
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
25
74
0.5
6.2
74
130
13
12
11
10
9
9
9
8
>7.5
>6
1.3
2.3
4610
250
300
60
1160
Filtered
75
80
0.4
7.5
6
1.3
1590
4.1
8.3
669
Non-
filtered
7
10
7.0
8
0.5
71
59
31
16
13
11
10
8
<5
>0.11
3.2
17
3.5
21
32
Filtered
6
9
<5
0.11
1.5
8.8
<1
2.1
32
C-17
-------
Table C-8. Dry Weather Urban Creek Water Quality Observations
35-Det. Pond
Influent
33-Det. Pond
Influent
12-Det. Pond
Influent
4-Det. Pond
Influent
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
5
5
7.0
135
59
41
39
35
30
27
25
24
22
3250
10
10
6.2
60
30
32
Filtered
9
17
500
1.3
17
Non-
filtered
0
0
6.8
126
30
54
50
44
38
34
32
29
25
2310
0.33
3.7
6.4
16
10
20
Filtered
23
26
350
1.5
3.6
20
Non-
filtered
20
20
7.2
5
7.9
83
45
29
23
21
19
17
16
204
120
78
38
21
297
69
40
59
128
102
61
237
64
78
126
103
0.76
2.4
310
100
70
23
Filtered
27
61
0.7
6.7
43
23
Non-
filtered
30
36
7.1
30
7.7
56
50
45
39
36
34
32
28
65
40
25
8
31
19
920
30
30
440
2.8
25
Filtered
33
42
120
1.2
16
C-18
-------
Table C-8. Dry Weather Urban Creek Water Quality Observations (Continued)
59-Linda Dr.
Creek
61-Shades
Plaza Creek
62-Patton Cr.
at Hwy 31
63-Patton CR.
at P.C. Rd.
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected ((ig/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
17
17
6.9
23
5.4
73
62
49
37
32
29
25
22
353
>0.31
52
10
23
1.7
11
Filtered
0
2
,
321
0.31
3.1
1.6
<1
<1
10
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.6
8
1.2
52
37
25
19
17
17
16
14
251
<0.1
30
10
23
>2.1
5
Filtered
12
20
251
<0.1
<0.1
<1
1.5
2.1
3
Non-
filtered
0
0
8.1
12
0.7
84
72
45
20
16
14
11
9
251
<0.1
14
4.8
2.9
<1
10
Filtered
1
7
251
<0.1
<0.1
<1
<1
<1
<1
Non-
filtered
0
0
8.2
5
0.5
51
33
17
12
10
9
8
7
>303
<0.1
<0.1
4.7
1.5
2.1
3
Filtered
0
0
303
<0.1
<0.1
<1
<1
<1
<1
C-19
-------
Table C-8. Dry Weather Urban Creek Water Quality Observations (Continued)
69-Shades Cr. at
Irondale
70-Shades Ck.
at Mt. Brook
71-Shades Cr.
at Brookwood
76-Shades Cr.
at Oxmoor
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
5
7
8.2
5
0.4
23
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
53
<0.1
>38
2.9
1.4
13
4
Filtered
5
6
<5
<0.1
3.8
<1
<1
1.9
4
Non-
filtered
11
15
8.6
5
0.6
85
63
26
16
12
10
9
7
94
<0.1
22
3.0
21
<1
<1
Filtered
9
13
93
<0.1
1.7
<1
1.6
<1
<1
Non-
filtered
6
13
8.2
30
0.4
63
36
25
20
17
17
16
14
284
<1
>0.72
4.8
13
22
4
Filtered
2
2
92
<0.1
0.72
1.2
<1
<1
1
Non-
filtered
0
7
7.7
27
23
52
50
46
43
40
38
35
29
1180
<0.1
2.6
11
13
24
9
Filtered
11
11
64
<0.1
0.26
<1
<1
1.7
5
C-20
-------
Table C-8. Dry Weather Urban Creek Water Quality Observations (Continued)
74-Little Cahaba
at Moody
73-Little
Cahaba at
Leeds
72-Little
Cahaba at
Bailey Rd.
75-Little
Cahaba below
Dam
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L) ^
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Cnrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
6
7
7.7
20
1.4
42
38
33
29
27
25
23
22
252
<0.1
>5.7
3.0
1.9
<1
4
Filtered
12
14
n/a1
<5
<0.1
5.7
<1
<1
<1
4
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.7
8
2.5
47
37
26
20
18
17
16
15
180
0.14
3.8
2.2
1.6
63
1
Filtered
13
13
n/a'
43
<0.1
0.19
<1
<1
<1
<1
Non-
filtered
4
4
8.0
7
1.7
27
17
15
12
11
10
10
9
84
<1
26
2.3
30
74
2
Filtered
6
11
84
<1
0.49
<1
<1
<1
<1
Non-
filtered
4
9
7.8
7
5.7
50
40
32
26
24
23
21
18
24
<0.1
17
14
2.1
30
4
Filtered
5
6
n/a'
<5
<0.1
0.83
<1
1.4
<1
4
sample bottle for filterable BNA analyses broke for these samples.
C-21
-------
Table C-8. Dry Weather Urban Creek Water Quality Observations (Continued)
70(2)-Shades Cr.
at Mt. Brook
71(2)-Shades
Cr. at
Brookwood
72(2)-Little
Cahaba at
Bailey Rd.
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichloro benzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
15
9.4
8.4
10
0.2
60
32
17
12
11
10
9
8
<5
<0.1
>1.4
21
16
<1
11
Filtered
21
17
<5
<0.1
1.4
1.7
1.5
<1
11
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.9
7
0.2
51
32
16
8
7
6
6
5
<5
0.18
>4.3
42
11
35
6
Filtered
0
7.3
<5
0.18
4.3
1.2
1.4
<1
6
Non-
filtered
0
0
7.9
30
0.8
60
54
48
41
39
37
34
30
692
<0.1
3.9
<1
44
1.8
9
Filtered
7
21
<5
<0.1
1.2
<1
1.1
<1
9
C-22
-------
Table C-9. Dry Weather Urban Detention Pond Water Quality Observations
3-Hoover Pond
11-
Georgetown
32-Georgetoen
Lake
36-Hoover
Pond
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ug/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
5
12
7.0
6
4
76
65
45
17
15
14
12
10
18
6.6
6
230
0.20
230
210
1.5
70
22
Filtered
0
15
6.6
6.6
5.8
210
0.04
22
Non-
filtered
16
16
7.1
5
4.5
87
72
39
26
23
21
18
16
15
27
53
68
10
5.8
13
14
57
860
0.12
1
70
1
25
Filtered
0
0
21
17
51
25
Non-
filtered
9
13
6.9
33
28
55
49
44
37
34
32
29
24
1350
0.28
10
23
8.8
30
22
Filtered
4
9
330
22
Non-
filtered
16
16
7.6
12
8.5
85
77
58
34
24
20
17
15
190
1
22
2.2
10
10
Filtered
20
20
190
10
C-23
-------
Table C-9. Dry Weather Urban Detention Pond Water Quality Observations (Continued)
60-Mt. Lake
64-Star Lake
65-
Georgetown L
66-Hoover
Pond
Micro t ox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
\35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
8
9
7.2
7
4.5
52
48
42
37
34
32
30
27
>362
11
15
19
4.5
<1
<1
Filtered
7
12
362
0.2
<0.1
<1
<1
<1
<1
Non-
filtered
25
25
7.2
60
13.7
62
57
50
44
40
37
34
29
1480
0.13
<0.1
0.2
55
1.2
10
Filtered
0
0
<5
0.10
<0.1
<1
<1
<1
8
Non-
filtered
2
2
7.0
13
2.7
59
42
35
31
28
27
25
22
334
<0.1
33
11
31
37
>12
Filtered
5
6
<5
<0.1
<0.1
<1
<1
2.2
12
Non-
filtered
11
11
7.6
7
2.5
52
35
26
23
21
19
18
16
141
<0.1
<0.1
10
43
<1.6
3
Filtered
16
17
121
<0.1
<0.1
<1
<1
1.6
3
C-24
-------
Table C-9. Dry Weather Urban Detention Pond Water Quality Observations (Continued)
67-Meadowbrook
68-Brook
Highlands
66(2)-Hoover
Pond
67(2)-
Meadowbrook
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
135 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Bis(chloroisopropyl) ether
Hexachloroethane
Bis(2-chloroethoxyl) methane
Naphthalene
Acenaphylene
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Anthracene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Benzo(b) fluoranthene
Benzo(k) fluoranthene
Benzo(a) pyrene
Benzo(g,h,i) perylene
Pesticides Detected
Alpha BHC
Delta BHC
Aldrin
DDT
Endrin
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Non-
filtered
41
65
n/a
8.0
20
1.2
52
49
45
39
37
35
33
29
1570
<0.1
1.2
37
>1.4
15
7
Filtered
7
8
<5
<0.1
Non-
filtered
0
0
8.5
3
0.5
34
27
21
17
16
16
15
14
<5
<0.1
<0.1 <0.1
<1 j 13
1.4
2.5
7
18
>1.5
3
Filtered
17
17
<5
<0.1
<0.1
<1
1.4
1.5
<1
Non-
filtered
10
19
7.7
13
0.7
50
36
29
24
23
22
19
17
430
>0.7
1.6
>35
24
6.3
<1
Filtered
3.7
14
211
0.69
1.3
35
<1
6.3
<1
Non-
filtered
0
8.4
8.6
28
1.6
63
60
57
53
50
50
52
43
8.3
<0.1
1.6
11
25
24
<1
Filtered
6.7
16
<5
<0.1
2.6
4.8
<1
<1
<1
C-25
-------
Table C-10. New York City Combined Sewer Overflow Water Quality Observations
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25 • i
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 ,3-Dichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Diethyl phthalate
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Pesticides Detected
BHC
ODD
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
Reg
Non-
filtered
9
14
7.2
36
25
81
71
59
48
43
39
35
29
17
1.2
410
1.4
30
50
50
5.6
41
46-49
Filtered
23
32
120
0.43
1.0
8.8
3.0
19
1
Non-
filtered
43
47
7.1
48
10
80
69
58
48
43
40
37
32
17
2510
1.0
50
120
3.2
31
•I-10A
Filtered
37
43
30
0.16
4.2
1.3
6
Non-
filtered
23
26
7.1
31
5.4
70
55
43
36
33
31
28
23
1450
0.65
60
50
9.1
19
TI-13
Filtered
13
48
n/a1
n/a1
161
0.22
11
9.1
9
B
Non-
filtered
59
61
0.1
7.3
34
11
74
65
59
51
47
44
41
36
23030
1.9
30
160
40
16
225
B-L-22
Filtered
54
59
0.8
164
0.72
9.3
7.08
64
insufficient sample for filtered BNA and filtered pesticide analyses.
C-26
-------
Table C-10. New York City Combined Sewer Overflow Water Quality Observations
(Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
11 0(%. light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Diethyl phthalate
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Pesticides Detected
BHC
ODD
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
BE
Non-
filtered
54
54
0.1
7.1
61
13
61
56
51
44
40
37
33
28
61
1610
1.1
9.6
100
60
10 .
53
-U4
Filtered
47
52
0.4
253
0.19
4.4
4.2
8
E
Non-
filtered
58
63
<0.1
7.1
56
13
69
62
55
49
45
42
38
33
710
2.0
30
90
70
20
55
SB-U2
Filtered
57
64
0.1
<5
0.25
5.7
5.1
13
Tl-re
Non-
filtered
48
54
0.85
6.7
44
25
69
60
52
45
41
39
35
32
720
1.6
40
50
19
30
120
g 46-49(2)
Filtered
42
49
20
0.88
1.6
3.5
48
BB-
Non-
filtered
71
76
0.01
6.5
447
107
17
15
14
12
11
10
9
8
10
22
7.7
9.3
38
33
82
6.6
560001
15
43
11
8.2
>161
1.2
8.8
64
1.7
30
220
U-2(2)
Filtere
d
69
75
0.05
161
0.74
1.5
15
6
likely contamination.
C-27
-------
Table C-10. New York City Combined Sewer Overflow Water Quality Observations
(Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
110 (% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1 , 3-Dichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Diethyl phthalate
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Pesticides Detected
BHC
ODD
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
TI-1
Non-
filtered
60
65
0.24
6.6
140
17
62
57
48
40
36
34
31
26
541
0.5
49
1.9
8.3
70
9.3
9.7
100
DA (2)
Filtered
54
68
0.28
<5
0.87
<1
8.3
1.7
8.7
18
BB
Non-
filtered
72
74
0.14
6.6
184
29
33
28
24
20
18
17
16
15
836
1780
10
130
190
110
29
390
-L-22 (2)
Filtered
66
72
0.14
<5
0.93
<1
6.9
2.2
5.8
31
BE
Non-
filtered
54
60
0.54
6.6
129
21
67
61
53
46
42
39
35
29
15.5
103
115
810
1.6
7.5
130
14
16
210
3-U4 (2)
Filtered
54
62
0.45
<5
0.81
<1
5.0
1.5
2.3
20
T
Non-
filtered
54
60
0.93
6.6
52
8.3
77
64
50
40
36
33
30
25
142
740
0.86
20
340
10
9.5
120
-13 (2)
Filtered
62
67
0.26
<5
0.67
<1
5.7
1.8
35
C-28
-------
Table C-10. New York City Combined Sewer Overflow Water Quality Observations
(Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
11 0(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
pH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (|ig/L)
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Diethyl phthalate
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Pesticides Detected
BHC
ODD
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
N
Non-
filtered
68
72
0.03
6.7
44
12
65
59
53
45
42
39
36
32
27
800
2.0
3.8
110
40
48
91
16
Filtered
70
76
0.23
423
<1
22
3.9
48
49
Non-
filtered
67
71
0.15
6.8
11
9.5
75
66
58
49
44
41
38
33
330
1.7
3.9
110
15
13
100
N 18
Filtered
68
77
0.03
174
3.6
26
2.9
13
80
Non-
filtered
40
49
6.8
62
31
61
53
44
36
32
29
26
20
500
8.9
16 ,
30
14
|_6.1
75
N23
Filtered
33
46
144
0.17
14
23
7.5
6.1
62
Non-
filtered
64
70
0.10
6.7
10
10
76
68
62
55
51
48
43
37
>543
1.1
>3.9
30
4.2
7.6
63
M36
Filtered
66
72
0.14
543
3.9
23
4.2
5.7
63
C-29
-------
Table C-10. New York City Combined Sewer Overflow Water Quality Observations
(Continued)
Microtox Toxicity
I10(% light decrease)
I35 (% light decrease)
EC50 (fraction)
Other Constituents
PH
Suspended solids (mg/L)
Turbidity (NTU)
Particle Size
10% larger (by vol.) than:
25
50
75
85
90
95
99
Base Neutrals Detected (ng/L)
Nitrobenzene
Isophorone
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
1,3-Dichlorobenzene
Naphthalene
Diethyl phthalate
Fluorene
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Phenanthrene
Benzyl butyl phthalate
Fluoranthene
Bis(2-ethyl hexyl) phthalate
Pyrene
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Benzo(a) anthracene
Chrysene
Pesticides Detected
BHC
ODD
Chlordane
Heavy Metals Detected
Aluminum
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Lead
Nickel
Zinc
M
Non-
filtered
59
60
0.34
6.6
169
28
75
65
58
50
47
44
42
37
570
5.1
40
70
90
5.4
130
13
Filtered
54
58
0.83
203
5.1
25
6.6
5.4
53
M
Non-
filtered
78
82
0.09
7.1
93
31
56
50
44
36
33
30
27
22
1290
10
29
110
90
15
200
36(2)
Filtered
61
65
0.55
283
17
3.8
5.5
44
l\
Non-
filtered
30
43
7.0
101
26
51
45
38
31
28
25
23
18
n/a
0.97
19
27
92
9.8
49
/I 2 (2)
Filtered
37
46
174
27
6.6
5.5
49
N
Non-
filtered
77
79
0.01
6.5
122
11
57
54
49
43
39
37
34
28
0.3
140
0.86
3.5
30
6.0
14
32
23(2)
Filtered
66
68
0.19
<5
12
3.2
14
32
C-30
-------
Table C-11. Sampling Site Descriptions - Rainfall Conditions During Source Area Sampling
Sample #
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Sample Date
3/30/89
3/30/89
3/30/89
3/30/89
3/30/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
5/14/89
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
6/4/90
7/2/89
Sample Time
6:05 AM
6:10
6:25
6:40
6:50
2:40 PM
2:50
3:00
3:30
3:35
3:50
4:00
4:05
4:15
4:25
4:45
4:50
5:30
5:30
5:40
5:40
6:04
10:45 AM
11:00
11:05
11:10
11:35
11:45
11:55
12:20
12:25
12:35
12:45
12:55
1:00 PM
1:10
1:30
1:35
1:40
1:45
7:00 AM
Rain depth before sample
was collected (in.)
1.73 (large)
1.73
1.73
1.73
1.73
0.41 (small)
0.45
0.50
0.53
0.53
0.53
0.53
0.54
0.54
0.54
0.54
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.1 9 (small)
0.19
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.27
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
2.06 (large)
Peak rain intensity
before sample was
collected (in./h)
0.37 (heavy)
0.37
0.37
0.37
0.37
0.20 (light)
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.18 (light)
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.99 (heavy)
Continued
C-31
-------
Table C-11. Sampling Site Descriptions - Rainfall Conditions During Source Area Sampling (Continued)
Sample #
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
71(2)
70(2)
67(2)
72(2)
66(2)
Sample Date
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
7/2/89
8/30/89
8/30/89
8/30/89
8/30/89
8/30/89
Sample Time
7:10
7:20
7:30
7:45
7:45
8:10
8:15
8:15
8:30
8:30
8:45
8:55
9:00
9:05
9:20
9:30
9:45
3:10 PM
3:30
4:10
4:30
5:30
Rain depth before sample
was collected (in.)
2.15
2.20
2.28
2.38
2.38
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.48
2.49
2.49
2.50
0.05 (small)
0.09
0.09
0.10
0.11
Peak rain intensity
before sample was
collected (in./h)
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.09 (light)
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
Note: the rain depths and rain intensities shown are the approximate amounts for these events, up until the time shown for sample
collection. The rain values were obtained from the meteorological station in Birmingham (in Homewood) and are only approximate
for the sampling locations. These values were used to approximate the rain category (light or heavy rain intensity, and small or large
rain amount). The rain history was also used to approximate the antecedent dry period before the event. Samples 59 - 76 were
collected during dry weather from local streams. The following list shows the approximate antecedent rain periods for these rains:
3/30/89: 3 days since previous rain to total 1", or more (short period)
5/14/89: 9 days since previous rains to total 1", or more (long period)
6/4/89: 13 days since previous rains to total 1", or more (long period)
7/2/89: <1 day since previous rains to total 1", or more (short period)
8/30/89: 28 days since previous rains to total 1", or more (long period)
C-32
-------
Table C-12. Sampling Location Descriptions
Sample* Date
Time
Rain
Temper.
Sample Location
Sample Description:
Land Use Source Color Turb. Oil Sheen
n
i
L>J
OJ
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3/30/?
3/30
3/30
3/30
3/30
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
5/14
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
6/4
i 6:05 AM
6:10
6:25
6:40
6:50
2:40 PM
3:30
3:35
3:50
4:05
4:15
4:25
4:45
4:50
5:30
5:30
5:40
5:40
6:04
10:45 AM
11:00
11:05
11:10
11:35
11:45
11:55
12:20
12:25
12:35
12:45
12:55
1:00
1:10
1:30
1:35
1:40
1:45
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
HARD RAIN
HARD RAIN
HARD RAIN
HARD RAIN
HARD RAIN
MOD. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
DRIZZLE
HARD RAIN
HARD RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
40-50
40-50
40-50
40-50
40-50
60-70
65
50-60
50-60
50-60
50-60
50-60
50-60
50-60
50-60
65
65
60-70
60-70
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
85
85
85
85
85
85
TRACE CROSSING IN HABERT
MEDIAN OF HEBERT BY A
GAS STATION ON 150 BY G
GREENTREE ARTS PARKING LOT
GREENTREE ARTS PLAYGROUND
2137 FARLEY BLLAN (HOOVER)
HOOVER CITY HALL PARK. LOT
HOOVER CITY HALL PONO-EFFL.
HOOVER CITY HALL POND-IN
FIRESTONE CAR SERVICE HUY 31 HOOVER
"THE WILLONS" APTS-LOMA ROAD
"THE UILLONS" APTS-LOMA ROAD
RIVER CHASE CAR WASH-LOMA RD. HOOVER
FOOD WORLD-LOMA RD. HWY 31 HOOVER
EXPRESS OIL CHANGE LOMA RD. HOOVER
GEORGETOWN LAKE PARK POND-OUT
GEORGETOWN LAKE PARK POND-IN
4th AVE S0/14th ST (DAYTON SUPERIOR)
3rd AVE S0/14th ST
15th ST BETWEEN 1st & 2nd AVE SO
11th AVE S0/13th ST BUSINESS INCUB.
UAB GRASS NEAR ENGINEERING BLDG
EVAN'S ROOF
PITT'S ROOF
JENKIN'S ROOF
FARLEY RD & LINDA
GRESHAM JH SCHOOL
LANDSCAPED AREA & GWIN ELEM. SCHOOL
GWIN ELEM. SCHOOL
HOOVER MALL
HOOVER MALL ROOF
GEORGETOWN LAKE OUT
GEORGETOWN LAKE IN
HOOVER CIY HALL POND IN
HOOVER POND OUT
GREENSPRINGS RD AUTO SHOP REGION
ARA AUTO AIRCOND.-GREENSPRINGS HWY
5th AVE/9th ST SO HARDWARE SPEC.
2nd ANE/11th ST SO
INDUS.
INDUS.
COMMER.
RESID.
RESID.
RESID.
INST.
MIXED
MIXED
COMMER.
RESID.
RESID.
COMM/IND
COMMER.
COMMER.
RESID.
RESID.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INST.
INST.
RESID.
RESID.
RESID.
RESID.
INST.
INST.
INST.
COMMER.
COMMER.
DET. POND
DET. POND
COMMER.
DET. POND
DET. POND
COMMER.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
YELLOW
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
S. FOAMY
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
GREENISH
CLEAR
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLOUDY
CLEAR
CLEAR
YELLOW
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
YELLOW
YELLOW
HIGH
HIGH
MOOER.
MOOER.
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
MOOER.
LOW
LOW
LOU
LOW
LOU
LOW
LOU
MODER.
HIGH
LOW
MOOER.
HIGH
LOU
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW-MOO.
MODER.
LOU
LOW
LOW- MOO.
LOW-MOO.
LOU
MOOER.
LOU
LOU
LOW
HODER.
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE-LGT
NONE
-------
n
UJ
Table C-12. Sampling Location Descriptions (Continued)
Sample*
A
8
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Landscaped
Area Type
GR. STRIPS
PARK YARD
FR. YARD
Other
Flat Pitched Area Unpaved
Roof Roof Type Area
STREET
VEH. AREA
PARKING
X
PARKING
VEH. SERV
PARKING
X
VEH. AREA
PARKING
X
STORAGE X
X
STREET
. PARKING X
X
X
X
STREET
PARKING X
PARKING
PARKING
Paved Area Type:
Cone. Asphalt
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PARKING
LOADING
PARKING X
STREET
Paved Area Texture:
Smooth Inter. Rough
X
X
X
X
Paved Area Condition:
Good Fair Poor
-------
Table C-12. Sampling Location Descriptions (Continued)
Sample* Date Time Rain Temper. Sample Location
Land Use
Source
Sample Description:
Color Turb. Oil Sheen
n
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
66(2)
67(2)
70(2)
71(2)
72(2)
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
7/2
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/20
8/21
8/30
8/30
8/30
8/30
8/30
8/21
8/21
8/21
8/21
8/21
8/21
7:00 AM
7:10
7:20
7:30
7:45
7:45
8:10
8:15
8:15
8:30
8:30
8:45
8:55
9:00
9:05
9:20
9:30
9:45
4:15 PM
4:20
4:30
4:40
4:55
5:00
5:10
5:20
5:40
5:50
6:35
6:46
7:10
7:45
7:55
8:05
8:35
9:30 AM
5:30 PM
4:10
3:30
3:10
4:30
8:20
8:30
8:40
8:50
9:05
9:15
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
DRIZZLE
MOO. RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
HARD RAIN
MOD. RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOO. RAIN
MOD. RAIN
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
HARD RAIN
HAD RAINE
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
DRIZZLE
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
NO RAIN
60-70
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
80-90
80-90
80-90
80-90
80-90
70-80
70-80
85
85
85
80-90
85
70-80
85
70-80
70-80
70-80
70-80
80-90
80-90
80-90
80-90
60-70
60-70
60-70
60-70
60-70
60-70
PITT'S LAWN 2137 FARLEY RD B'HAM
BLUGG PARK ELEM. SCHOOL
SHOPPING CENTER
BLUGG PARK SHOPPING CENTER
GOODYEAR STORE-GREENSPRINGS RD
SECO AUTO PARTS GREENSPRINGS
ARA AUTO AIRCONO. GREENSPRINGS
SPECIALTY HARDWARE/rr ROW
EBSCO MEDIA 5th AVE SO
2nd AVE/1st ST SO SHERMAN
13th ST/1st AVE SO NABISCO
14th ST/1st AVE SO STOZE PIPE YARD
RR ROW 2nd AVE SO
MESSA AMPAT ON 29th ST N
INDUSTRIAL STORE MESSA/30th ST N
3200 8th AVE N BELL SOUTH SEWER
LINDA DR
MT LAKE
TYLER 3 SHADES MT PLAZA
SOUTHLAND DR NEAR HWY 31 PATTON CRK
PATTON CHAPEL CREEK 3 PATTON CHAPEL RD
STAR LAKE
GEORGETOWN LAKE
HOOVER CITY HALL LAKE
MEADOU BROOK POND/APCO RESOURCE CTRE
BROOK HIGHLANDS DETENTION POND
SHADES CREEK, 25th ST 3 CRESTWOOO
SHADES CREEK 3 MONARCH NEAR MT BROOK
SHADES CREEK 3 31 & BROOKWOOD MALL
LITTLE CAHABA RIVER, BAILEY RD
HWY 119 LIT. CAHABA CREEK LEEDS PARK
LITTLE CAHABA IN MOODY 3 HWY 411
LITTLE CAHABA BELLOW DAM
SHADES CREEK 3 OXMORE
HOOVER CITY HALL POND
MEADOW BROOK POND 3 APCO RESOURCES
SHADES CREEK 3 MONARCH
SHADES CREEK 3 ROBERT JAMESON PARK
LITTLE CAHABA RIVER 3 BAILY RD
IVAR'S RESTAURENT 61st ST & 15th NW
U.S. BANK 15th NW & NU 67th
SUNSET BOWLING ALLEY NW & NW MARKET
FIRESTONE SERV., 14th NW & NW 54th
OLYMPIC STAIN, 1141 NW 50th
JUNK YARD, 1141 NW BALLARD WY
RESID.
INST.
COMMER,
COMMER,
COMMER.
COMMER.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
INDUS.
RESIO.
RESID.
RES/COM
COMMER.
RES/COM
COMMER.
COMMER.
COMMER.
COM/IND
INDUS.
INDUS.
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDD-FL.
PUDD-FL.
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
POND
POND
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
FL. WATER
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
PUDDLE
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
CLEAR
RED-YELLO
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
BLACK
YELLOW
CLEAR
CLEAR
BLACK
CLEAR
BROWN
GRN-YELW
V. CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
GRN-YELW
CLEAR-YEL
CLEAR
GREEN
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
CLEAR
BROWN
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
MODER.
LOW
MODER.
MODER.
LOW-MOO.
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
MODER.
LOU
LOW
MODER.
LOW
LOW
LOW
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
LIGHT
NONE
NONE
MODER.
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
HEAVY
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
NONE
LIGHT
-------
Table C-12. Sampling Location Descriptions (Continued)
Other
Landscaped Flat Pitched Area Unpaved
Area Type Roof Roof Type Area
Paved Area Type:
Cone. Asphalt
Paved Area Texture:
Smooth Inter. Rough
Paved Area Condition:
Good Fair Poor
n
i
OJ
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
66(2)
67(2)
70(2)
71(2)
72(2)
SI
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
STREET
STORAGE
PARKING
AUTO SERV
STORAGE
LOADING
PARKING
STREET
STORAGE
STORAGE
STORAGE
PARKING
LOADING
PARKING
PARKING
DRIVEWAYS
DRIVEWAYS
SIDEWALK
STORAGE
-------
n
OJ
01.. S.mPlin9
CSO # NY Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
g
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
TI 49
TI 10A
TI 13
BB-L22
BB U4
BB U2
TI 49(2
BB U2 (
TI 10A
BB-L22
BB U4
TI 13
M 13
N 23
M 2
M 36
Ux
2
2
,2
'2
2
B || (2,
N if /
M 36 (.
2\
)
DescHp.ions
Sampling
Date
Sampling
Time
Percentage of Area by Land Use;
Light
Resid. Instit. Commer. I
93
100
98
75
78
0
93
0
100
75
78
98
64
80
64
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
20
13
20
0
6
0
2
20
12
0
6
0
0
20
12
2
5
6
0
t
s .
1
0
0
5
10
100
1
100
0
5
10
0
5
0
5
0
Manuf ac.
Indus .
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
2
5
0
-------
Appendix D
Receiving Water Impacts
The main purpose of treating stormwater is to reduce its adverse impacts on receiving water beneficial uses.
Therefore, it is important in any urban stormwater runoff study to assess the detrimental effects that runoff
is actually having on a receiving water. Urban receiving waters may have many beneficial use goals,
including:
• stormwater conveyance (flood prevention)
• biological uses (warm water fishery, biological integrity, etc.)
• non-contact recreation (linear parks, aesthetics, boating, etc.)
• contact recreation (swimming)
• water supply
With full development in an urban watershed and with no stormwater controls, it is unlikely that any 6f
these uses can be obtained. With less development and with the application of stormwater controls, some
uses may be possible. It is important that unreasonable expectations not be placed on urban waters, as the
cost to obtain these uses may be prohibitive. With full-scale development and lack of adequate stormwater
controls, severely degraded streams will be common. However, stormwater conveyance and aesthetics
should be the basic beneficial use goals for all urban waters. Biological integrity should also be a goal, but
with the realization that the natural stream ecosystem will be severely modified with urbanization. Certain
basic controls, installed at the time of development, plus protection of stream habitat, may enable partial
use of some of these basic goals in urbanized watersheds. Careful planning and optimal utilization of
stormwater controls are necessary to obtain these basic goals in most watersheds. Water contact recreation,
consumptive fisheries, and water supplies are not appropriate goals for most urbanized watersheds. These
higher uses may be possible in urban areas where the receiving waters are large and drain mostly
undeveloped areas.
In general, monitoring of urban stormwater runoff has indicated that the biological beneficial uses of urban
receiving waters are most likely affected by habitat destruction and long-term pollutant exposures
(especially to macroinvertebrates via contaminated sediment), while documented effects associated from
acute exposures of toxicants in the water column are rare (Field and Pitt 1990; Pitt 1994; Pitt 1995).
Receiving water pollutant concentrations resulting from runoff events and typical laboratory bioassay test
results have not indicated many significant short-term receiving water problems. As an example, Lee and
Jones-Lee (1993) state that exceedences of numeric criteria by short-term discharges do not necessarily
imply that a beneficial use impairment exists. Many toxicologists and water quality expects have concluded
that the relatively short periods of exposures to the toxicant concentrations in stormwater are not sufficient
to produce the receiving water effects that are evident in urban receiving waters, especially considering the
relatively large portion of the toxicants that are associated with particulates (Lee and Jones-Lee 1995). Lee
and Jones-Lee (1995) conclude that the biological problems evident in urban receiving waters are mostly
associated with illegal discharges and that the sediment bound toxicants are of little risk. Mancini and
Plummer (1986) have long been advocates of numeric water quality standards for stormwater that reflect
the partitioning of the toxicants and the short periods of exposure during rains. Unfortunately, this approach
attempts to isolate individual runoff events and does not consider the accumulative adverse effects caused
by the frequent exposures of receiving water organisms to stormwater (Davies 1995; Herricks, et al. 1996a
and 1996b). Recent investigations have identified acute toxicity problems associated with short-term (about
10 to 20 day) exposures to adverse toxicant concentrations in urban receiving streams (Crunkilton, et al.
D-l
-------
1996). However, the most severe receiving water problems are likely associated with chronic exposures to
contaminated sediment and to habitat destruction. The following is a summary of recent work describing
the toxicological and ecological effects of stormwater.
Toxicological Effects of Stormwater
The need for endpoints for toxicological assessments using multiple stressors was discussed by Marcy and
Gerritsen (1996). They used five watershed-level ecological risk assessments to develop appropriate
endpoints based on specific project objectives. Dyer and White (1996) also examined the problem of
multiple stressors affecting toxicity assessments. They felt that field surveys rarely can be used to verify
simple single parameter laboratory experiments. They developed a watershed approach integrating
numerous databases in conjunction with in-situ biological observations to help examine the effects of many
possible causative factors. Toxic effect endpoints are additive for compounds having the same "mode of
toxic action", enabling predictions of complex chemical mixtures in water, as reported by Environmental
Science & Technology (I996a). According to EPA researchers at the Environmental Research Laboratory
in Duluth, MN, there are about five or six major action groups that contain almost all of the compounds of
interest in the aquatic environment. Much work still needs to be done, but these new developing tools may
enable the in-stream toxic effects of stormwater to be better predicted.
Ireland, el al. (1996) found that exposure to UV radiation (natural sunlight) increased the toxicity of PAH
contaminated urban sediments to C. dubia. The toxicity was removed when the UV wavelengths did not
penetrate the water column to the exposed organisms. Toxicity was also reduced significantly in the
presence of UV when the organic fraction of the stormwater was removed. Photo-induced toxicity occurred
frequently during low flow conditions and wet weather runoff and was reduced during turbid conditions.
Johnson, et al. (1996) and Herricks, et al. (1996a and 1996b) describe a structured tier testing protocol to
assess both short-term and long-term wet weather discharge toxicity that they developed and tested. The
protocol recognizes that the test systems must be appropriate to the time-scale of exposure during the
discharge. Therefore, three time-scale protocols were developed, for ihtra-event, event, and long-term
exposures. The use of standard whole effluent toxicity (WET) tests were found to over-estimate the
potential toxicity of stormwater discharges.
The effects of stormwater on Lincoln Creek, near Milwaukee, WI, were described by Crunkilton, et al.
(1996). Lincoln Creek drains a heavily urbanized watershed of 19 mi2 that is about nine miles long. On-site
toxicity testing was conducted with side-stream flow-through aquaria using fathead minnows, plus in-
stream biological assessments, along with water and sediment chemical measurements. In the basic tests,
Lincoln Creek water was continuously pumped through the test tanks, reflecting the natural changes in
water quality during both dry and wet weather conditions. The continuous flow-through mortality tests
indicated no toxicity until after about 14 d of exposure, with more than 80% mortality after about 25 d,
indicating that short-term toxicity tests likely underestimate stormwater toxicity. The biological and
physical habitat assessments supported a definitive relationship between degraded stream ecology and
urban runoff.
Rainbow (1996) presented a detailed overview of heavy metals in aquatic invertebrates. He concluded that
the presence of a metal in an organism cannot tell us directly whether that metal is poisoning the organism.
However, if compared to concentrations in a suite of well-researched biomonitors, it is possible to
determine if the accumulated concentrations are atypically high, with a possibility that toxic effects may be
present. Allen (1996) also presented an overview of metal contaminated aquatic sediments. This book
presents many topics that would enable the user to better interpret measured heavy metal concentrations in
urban stream sediments.
Ecological Effects of Stormwater
A number of comprehensive and long-term studies of biological beneficial uses in areas not affected by
conventional point source discharges have typically shown impairments caused by urban runoff. The
following paragraphs briefly describe a variety of such studies.
D-2
-------
Klein (1979) studied 27 small watersheds having similar physical characteristics, but having varying land
uses, in the Piedmont region of Maryland. During an initial phase of the study, they found definite
relationships between water quality and land use. Subsequent study phases examined aquatic life
relationships in the watersheds. The principal finding was that stream aquatic life problems were first
identified with watersheds having imperviousness areas comprising at least 12 percent of the watershed.
Severe problems were noted after the imperviousness quantities reached 30 percent.
Receiving water impact studies were also conducted in North Carolina (Lenet, et al. 1979; Lenet and
Eagleson 1981; Lenat, et al. 1981). The benthic fauna occurred mainly on rocks. As sedimentation
increased, the amount of exposed rocks decreased, with a decreasing density of benthic macroinvertebrates.
Data from 1978 and 1979 in five cities showed that urban streams were grossly polluted by a combination
of toxicants and sediment. Chemical analyses, without biological analyses, would have underestimated the
severity of the problems because the water column quality varied rapidly, while the major problems were
associated with sediment quality and effects on macroinvertebrates. Macroinvertebrate diversities were
severely reduced in the urban streams, compared to the control streams. The biotic indices indicated very
poor conditions for all urban streams. Occasionally, high populations of pollutant tolerant organisms were
found in the urban streams, but would abruptly disappear before subsequent sampling efforts. This was
probably caused by intermittent discharges of spills or illegal dumpings of toxicants. Although the cities
studied were located in different geographic areas of North Carolina, the results were remarkably uniform.
During the Coyote Creek, San Jose, California, receiving water study, 41 stations were sampled in both
urban and nonurban perennial flow stretches of the creek over three years. Short and long-term sampling
techniques were used to evaluate the effects of urban runoff on water quality, sediment properties, fish,
macroinvertebrates, attached algae, and rooted aquatic vegetation (Pitt and Bozeman 1982). These
investigations found distinct differences in the taxonomic composition and relative abundance of the
aquatic biota present. The non-urban sections of the creek supported a comparatively diverse assemblage of
aquatic organisms including an abundance of native fishes and numerous benthic macroinvertebrate taxa.
In contrast, however, the urban portions of the creek (less than 5% urbanized), affected only by urban
runoff discharges and not industrial or municipal discharges, had an aquatic community generally lacking
in diversity and was dominated by pollution-tolerant organisms such as mosquitofish and tubificid worms.
A major nonpoint runoff receiving water impact research program was conducted in Georgia (Cook, et al.
1983). Several groups of researchers examined streams in major areas of the state. Benke, et al. (1981)
studied 21 stream ecosystems near Atlanta having watersheds of one to three square miles each and land
uses ranging from 0 to 98 percent urbanization. They measured stream water quality but found little
relationship between water quality and degree of urbanization. The water quality parameters also did not
identify a major degree of pollution. In contrast, there were major correlations between urbanization and
the number of species found. They had problems applying diversity indices to their study because the
individual organisms varied greatly in size (biomass). CTA (1983) also examined receiving water aquatic
biota impacts associated with urban runoff sources in Georgia. They studied habitat composition, water
quality, macroinvertebrates, periphyton, fish, and toxicant concentrations in the water, sediment, and fish.
They found that the impacts of land use were the greatest in the urban basins. Beneficial uses were
impaired or denied in all three urban basins studied. Fish were absent in two of the basins and severely
restricted in the third. The native macroinvertebrates were replaced with pollution tolerant organisms. The
periphyton in the urban streams were very different from those found in the control streams and were
dominated by species known to create taste and odor problems.
Pratt, et al. (1981) used basket artificial substrates to compare benthic population trends along urban and
nonurban areas of the Green River in Massachusetts. The benthic community became increasing disrupted
as urbanization increased. The problems were not only associated with times of heavy rain, but seemed to
be affected at all times. The stress was greatest during summer low flow periods and was probably
localized near the stream bed. They concluded that the high degree of correspondence between the known
sources of urban runoff and the observed effects on the benthic community was a forceful argument that
urban runoff was the causal agent of the disruption observed.
D-3
-------
Cedar swamps in the New Jersey Pine Barrens were studied by Ehrenfeld and Schneider (1983). They
examined nineteen wetlands subjected to varying amounts of urbanization. Typical plant species were lost
and replaced by weeds and exotic plants in urban runoff affected wetlands. Increased uptakes of
phosphorus and lead in the plants were found. It was concluded that the presence of stormwater runoff to
the cedar swamps caused marked changes in community structure, vegetation dynamics, and plant tissue
element concentrations.
Medeiros and Coler (1982) and Medeiros, et al. (1984) used a combination of laboratory and field studies
to investigate the effects of urban runoff on fathead minnows. Hatchability, survival, and growth were
assessed in the laboratory in flow-through and static bioassay tests. Growth was reduced to one half of the
control growth rates at 60 percent dilutions of urban runoff. The observed effects were believed to be
associated with a combination of toxicants.
The University of Washington (Pederson 1981; Richey, et al. 1981; Perkins 1982; Richey 1982; Scott, et
al. 1982; Ebbert, et a!. 1983; Pitt and Bissonnette 1984; and Prych and Ebbert undated) conducted a series
of studies to contrast the biological and chemical conditions in urban Kelsey Creek with rural Bear Creek in
Bellevue, Washington. The urban creek was significantly degraded when compared to the rural creek, but
still supported a productive, but limited and unhealthy salmonid fishery. Many of the fish in the urban
creek, however, had respiratory anomalies. The urban creek was not grossly polluted, but flooding from
urban developments had increased dramatically in recent years. These increased flows dramatically
changed the urban stream's channel, by causing unstable conditions with increased stream bed movement,
and by altering the availability of food for the aquatic organisms. The aquatic organisms were very
dependent on the few relatively undisturbed reaches. Dissolved oxygen concentrations in the sediments
depressed embryo salmon survival in the urban creek. Various organic and metallic priority pollutants were
discharged to the urban creek, but most of them were apparently carried through the creek system by the
high storm flows to Lake Washington. The urbanized Kelsey Creek also had higher water temperatures
(probably due to reduced shading) than Bear Creek. This probably caused the faster fish growth in Kelsey
Creek.
The fish population in the urbanized Kelsey Creek had adapted to its degrading environment by shifting the
species composition from coho salmon to less sensitive cutthroat trout and by making extensive use of less
disturbed refuge areas. Studies of damaged gills found that up to three-fourths of the fish in Kelsey Creek
were affected with respiratory anomalies, while no cutthroat trout and only two of the coho salmon sampled
in the forested Bear Creek had damaged gills. Massive fish kills in Kelsey Creek and its tributaries were
also observed on several occasions during the project due to the dumping of toxic materials down the storm
drains.
There were also significant differences in the numbers and types of benthic organisms found in urban and
forested creeks during the Bellevue research. Mayflies, stoneflies, caddisflies, and beetles were rarely
observed in the urban Kelsey Creek, but were quite abundant in the forested Bear Creek. These organisms
are commonly regarded as sensitive indicators of environmental degradation. One example of degraded
conditions in Kelsey Creek was shown by a specie of clams (Unionidae) that was not found in Kelsey
Creek, but was commonly found in Bear Creek. These clams are very sensitive to heavy siltation and
unstable sediments. Empty clam shells, however, were found buried in the Kelsey Creek sediments
indicating their previous presence in the creek and their inability to adjust to the changing conditions. The
benthic organism composition in Kelsey Creek varied radically with time and place while the organisms
were much more stable in Bear Creek.
Urban runoff impact studies were conducted in the Hillsborough River near Tampa Bay, Florida, as part of
the U.S. EPA's Nationwide Urban Runoff Program (NURP) (Mote Marine Laboratory 1984). Plants,
animals, sediment, and water quality were all studied in the field and supplemented by laboratory bioassay
tests. Effects of salt water intrusion and urban runoff were both measured because of the estuarine
environment. During wet weather, freshwater species were found closer to the Bay than during dry
weather. In coastal areas, these additional natural factors made it even more difficult to identify the cause
and effect relationships for aquatic life problems. During another NURP project, Striegl (1985) found that
D-4
-------
the effects of accumulated pollutants in Lake Ellyn (Glen Ellyn, 111.) inhibited desirable benthic
invertebrates and fish and increased undesirable phyotoplankton blooms.
The number of benthic organism taxa in Shabakunk Creek in Mercer County, New Jersey, declined from
13 in relatively undeveloped areas to four below heavily urbanized areas (Garie and Mclntosh 1986 and
1990). Periphyton samples were also analyzed for heavy metais with significantly higher metal
concentrations found below the heavily urbanized area than above.
Many of the above noted biological effects associated with urban runoff are likely caused by polluted
sediments and benthic organism impacts. Examples of heavy metal and nutrient accumulations in
sediments are numerous. In addition to the studies noted above, DePinto, et al. (1980) found that the
cadmium content of river sediments can be more than 1,000 times greater than the overlying water
concentrations and the accumulation factors in sediments are closely correlated with sediment organic
content. Another comprehensive study on polluted sediment was conducted by Wilber and Hunter (1980)
along the Saddle River in New Jersey where they found significant increases in sediment contamination
with increasing urbanization.
The effects of urban runoff on receiving water aquatic organisms or other beneficial uses is very site
specific. Different land development practices create substantially different runoff flow characteristics.
Different rain patterns cause different particulate washoff, transport and dilution conditions. Local attitudes
also define specific beneficial uses and, therefore, current problems. There is also a wide variety of water
types receiving urban runoff, and these waters all have watersheds that are urbanized to various degrees.
Therefore, it is not surprising that urban runoff effects, though generally dramatic, are also quite variable
and site specific. Claytor (I996a) summarized the approach developed by the Center for Watershed
Protection as part of their EPA sponsored research on stormwater indicators (Claytor and Brown 1996).
The 26 stormwater indicators used for assessing receiving water conditions were divided into six broad
categories: water quality, physical/hydrological, biological, social, programmatic, and site. These were
presented as tools to measure stress (impacting receiving waters), to assess the resource itself, and to
indicate stormwater control program implementation effectiveness. The biological communities in
Delaware's Piedmont streams have been severely impacted by stormwater, after the extent of
imperviousness in the watersheds exceeds about 8 to 15%, according to a review article by Claytor (1996c).
If just conventional water quality measures are used, almost all (87%) of the state's non-tidal streams
supported their designated biological uses. However, when biological assessments are included, only 13%
of the streams were satisfactory.
Changes in physical stream channel characteristics can have a significant effect on the biological health of
the stream. Schueler (1996) stated that channel geometry stability can be a good indicator of the
effectiveness of stormwater control practices. He also found that once a watershed area has more than about
10 to 15% effective impervious cover, noticeable changes in channel morphology occur, along with
quantifiable impacts on water quality, and biological conditions. Stephenson (1996) studied changes in
streamflow volumes in South Africa during urbanization. He found increased stormwater runoff, decreases
in the groundwater table, and dramatically decreased times of concentration. The peak flow rates increased
by about two-fold, about half caused by increased pavement (in an area having only about 5% effective
impervious cover), with the remainder caused by decreased times of concentration.
Fates of Stormwater Pollutants in Surface Waters
Many processes may affect urban runoff pollutants after discharge. Sedimentation in the receiving water is
the most common fate mechanism because many of the pollutants investigated are mostly associated with
settleable particulate matter and have relatively low filterable concentration components. Exceptions
include zinc and 1,3-dichlorobenzene which are mostly associated with the filtered sample portions.
Particulate reduction can occur in many stormwater runoff and combined sewer overflow (SCSO) control
facilities, including (but not limited to) catchbasins, swirl concentrators, fine mesh screens, sand or other
filters, drainage systems, and detention ponds. These control facilities (with the possible exception of
drainage systems) allow reduction of the accumulated polluted sediment for final disposal in an appropriate
manner. Uncontrolled sedimentation will occur in relatively quiescent receiving waters, such as lakes,
D-5
-------
reservoirs, or slow moving rivers or streams. In these cases, the wide dispersal of the contaminated
sediment is difficult to remove and can cause significant detrimental effects on biological processes.
Biological or chemical degradation of the sediment toxicants may occur in the typically anaerobic
environment of the sediment, but the degradation is quite slow for many of the pollutants. Degradation by
photochemical reaction and volatilization (evaporation) of the soluble pollutants may also occur, especially
when these pollutants are near the surface of aerated waters (Callahan, et al. 1979; Farmer 1993). Increased
turbulence and aeration encourages these degradation processes, which in turn may significantly reduce
toxicant concentrations. In contrast, quiescent waters would encourage sedimentation that would also
reduce water column toxicant concentrations, but increase sediment toxicant concentrations. Metal
precipitation and sorption of pollutants onto suspended solids increases the sedimentation and/or floatation
potential of the pollutants and also encourages more efficient bonding of the pollutants to soil particles,
preventing their leaching to surrounding waters.
Receiving waters have a natural capacity to treat and/or assimilate polluted discharges. This capacity will
be exceeded sooner (assuming equal inputs), resulting in more degradation, in smaller urban creeks and
streams, than in larger receiving waters. Larger receiving waters may still have ecosystem problems from
the long-term build up of toxicants in the sediment and repeated exposures to high flowrates, but these
problems will be harder to identify using chemical analyses of the water alone, because of increased
dilution (Pitt and Bissonnette 1984).
In-stream receiving water investigations of urban runoff effects need a mult-tiered monitoring approach,
including habitat evaluations, water and sediment quality monitoring, flow monitoring, and biological
investigations, conducted over long periods of time (Pitt 1991). In-stream taxonomic (biological
community structure) investigations are needed to help identify actual toxicity problems. Laboratory
bioassay tests can be useful to determine the major sources of toxicants and to investigate toxicity reduction
through treatment, but they are not a substitute for actual in-stream investigations of receiving water
effects. In order to identify the sources and treatability of the problem pollutants, detailed watershed
investigations are needed, including both dry and wet weather urban drainage monitoring and source area
monitoring.
An estimate of the actual pollutant loads (calculated from the runoff volumes and pollutant concentrations)
from different watershed areas is needed for the selection and design of most treatment devices. Several
characteristics of a source area are significant influences on the pollutant concentrations and stormwater
runoff volumes. The washoff of debris, soil, and pollutants depends on the intensity of the rain, the
properties of the material removed, and the surface characteristics where the material resides. The potential
mass of pollutants available to be washed off will be directly related to the time interval between runoff
events during which the pollutants can accumulate.
Human Health Effects of Stormwater
Water Environment & Technology (1996b) reported on an epidemiology study conducted at Santa Monica
Bay, C A, that found that swimmers who swam in front of stormwater outfalls were 50% more likely to
develop a variety of symptoms than those who swam 400 m from the same outfalls (Haile, et al. 1996).
This was a follow-up study after previous investigations found that human fecal waste was present in the
stormwater collection systems. Environmental Science & Technology (1996b) also reported on this Santa
Monica Bay study. They reported that more than 1% of the swimmers who swam in front of the outfalls
were affected by fevers, chills, ear discharges, vomiting and coughing, based on surveys of more than
15,000 swimmers. The health effects were also more common for swimmers who were exposed on days
when viruses were found in the outfall water samples.
Water Environment & Technology (1996a) reported that the fecal coliform counts decreased from about
500 counts/100 mL to about 150 counts/100 mL in the Mississippi River after the sewer separation
program in the Minneapolis and St. Paul area of Minnesota. Combined sewers in 8,500 ha were separated
during this 10-year, $332 million program.
D-6
-------
Groundwater Impacts from Stormwater Infiltration
Prior to urbanization, groundwater recharge resulted from infiltration of precipitation through pervious
surfaces, including grasslands and woods. This infiltrating water was relatively uncontaminated. With
urbanization, the permeable soil surface area through which recharge by infiltration could occur was
reduced. This resulted in much less groundwater recharge and greatly increased surface runoff. In addition,
the waters available for recharge generally carried increased quantities of pollutants. With urbanization,
new sources of groundwater recharge also occurred, including recharge from domestic septic tanks,
percolation basins and industrial waste injection wells, and from agricultural and residential irrigation. The
following paragraphs (from Pitt, et al. 1994 and 1996) describe the stormwater pollutants that have the
greatest potential of adversely affecting groundwater quality during inadvertent or intentional stormwater
infiltration, along with suggestions on how to minimize these potential problems.
Constituents of Concern
Nutrients
Nitrates are one of the most frequently encountered contaminants in groundwater. Groundwater
contamination of phosphorus has not been as widespread, or as severe, as for nitrogen compounds.
Whenever nitrogen-containing compounds come into contact with soil, a potential for nitrate leaching into
groundwater exists, especially in rapid-infiltration wastewater basins, stormwater infiltration devices, and
in agricultural areas. Nitrate has leached from fertilizers and affected groundwaters under various turf
grasses in urban areas, including golf courses, parks and home lawns. Significant leaching of nitrates
occurs during the cool, wet seasons. Cool temperatures reduce denitrification and ammonia volatilization,
and limit microbial nitrogen immobilization and plant uptake. The use of slow-release fertilizers is
recommended in areas having potential groundwater nitrate problems. The slow-release fertilizers include
urea formaldehyde (UF), methylene urea, isobutylidene diurea (IBDU), and sulfur-coated urea. Residual
nitrate concentrations are highly variable in soil due to soil texture, mineralization, rainfall and irrigation
patterns, organic matter content, crop yield, nitrogen fertilizer/sludge rate, denitrification, and soil
compaction. Nitrate is highly soluble (>1 kg/L) and will stay in solution in the percolation water, after
leaving the root zone, until it reaches the groundwater.
Pesticides
Urban pesticide contamination of groundwater can result from municipal and homeowner use of pesticides
for pest control and their subsequent collection in stormwater runoff. Pesticides that have been found in
urban groundwaters include: 2,4-D, 2,4,5-T, atrazine, chlordane, diazinon, ethion, malathion, methyl
trithion, silvex, and simazine. Heavy repetitive use of mobile pesticides on irrigated and sandy soils likely
contaminates groundwater. Fungicides and nematocides must be mobile in order to reach the target pest
and hence, they generally have the highest contamination potential. Pesticide leaching depends on patterns
of use, soil texture, total organic carbon content of the soil, pesticide persistence, and depth to the water
table.
The greatest pesticide mobility occurs in areas with coarse-grained or sandy soils without a hardpan layer,
having low clay and organic matter content and high permeability. Structural voids, which are generally
found in the surface layer of finer-textured soils rich in clay, can transmit pesticides rapidly when the voids
are filled with water and the adsorbing surfaces of the soil matrix are bypassed. In general, pesticides with
low water solubilities, high octanol-water partitioning coefficients, and high carbon partitioning
coefficients are less mobile. The slower moving pesticides have been recommended in areas of
groundwater contamination concern. These include the fungicides iprodione and triadimefon, the
insecticides isofenphos and chlorpyrifos and the herbicide glyphosate. The most mobile pesticides include:
2,4-D, acenaphthylene, alachlor, atrazine, cyanazine, dacthal, diazinon, dicamba, malathion, and
metolachlor.
Pesticides decompose in soil and water, but the total decomposition time can range from days to years.
Literature half-lives for pesticides generally apply to surface soils and do not account for the reduced
microbial activity found deep in the vadose zone. Pesticides with a thirty-day half life can show
considerable leaching. An order-of-magnitude difference in half-life results in a five- to ten-fold difference
D-7
-------
in percolation loss. Organophosphate pesticides are less persistent than organochlorine pesticides, but they
also are not strongly adsorbed by the sediment and are likely to leach into the vadose zone, and the
groundwater.
Other Organics
The most commonly occurring organic compounds that have been found in urban groundwaters include
phthalate esters (especially bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate) and phenolic compounds. Other organics more
rarely found, possibly due to losses during sample collection, have included the volatiles: benzene,
chloroform, methylene chloride, trichloroethylene, tetrachloroethylene, toluene, and xylene. PAHs
(especially benzo(a)anmracene, chrysene, anthracene and benzo(b)fluoroanthenene) have also been found
in groundwaters near industrial sites.
Groundwater contamination from organics, like from other pollutants, occurs more readily in areas with
sandy soils and where the water table is near the land surface. Removal of organics from the soil and
recharge water can occur by one of three methods: volatilization, sorption, and degradation. Volatilization
can significantly reduce the concentrations of the most volatile compounds in groundwater, but the rate of
gas transfer from the soil to the air is usually limited by the presence of soil water. Hydrophobic sorption
onto soil organic matter limits the mobility of less soluble base/neutral and acid extractable compounds
through organic soils and the vadose zone. Sorption is not always a permanent removal mechanism,
however. Organic re-solubilization can occur during wet periods following dry periods. Many organics can
be at least partially degraded by microorganisms, but others cannot. Temperature, pH, moisture content, ion
exchange capacity of soil, and air availability may limit the microbial degradation potential for even the
most degradable organic.
Pathogenic Microorganisms
Viruses have been detected in groundwater where stormwater recharge basins were located short distances
above the aquifer. Enteric viruses are more resistant to environmental factors than enteric bacteria and they
exhibit longer survival times in natural waters. They can occur in potable and marine waters in the absence
of fecal coliforms. Enteroviruses are also more resistant to commonly used disinfectants than are indicator
bacteria, and can occur in groundwater in the absence of indicator bacteria.
The factors that affect the survival of enteric bacteria and viruses in the soil include pH, antagonism from
soil microflora, moisture content, temperature, sunlight, and organic matter. The two most important
attributes of viruses that permit their long-term survival in the environment are their structure and very
small size. These characteristics permit virus occlusion and protection within colloid-size particles. Viral
adsorption is promoted by increasing cation concentration, decreasing pH and decreasing soluble organics.
Since the movement of viruses through soil to groundwater occurs in the liquid phase and involves water
movement and associated suspended virus particles, the distribution of viruses between the adsorbed and
liquid phases determines the viral mass available for movement. Once the virus reaches the groundwater, it
can travel laterally through the aquifer until it is either adsorbed or inactivated.
The major bacterial removal mechanisms in soil are straining at the soil surface and at intergrain contacts,
sedimentation, sorption by soil particles, and inactivation. Because of their larger size than for viruses, most
bacteria are therefore retained near the soil surface due to this straining effect. In general, enteric bacteria
survive in soil between two and three months, although survival times up to five years have been
documented.
Heavy Metals and Other Inorganic Compounds
Heavy metals and other inorganic compounds in stormwater of most environmental concern, from a
groundwater pollution standpoint, are aluminum, arsenic, cadmium, chromium, copper, iron, lead, mercury,
nickel, and zinc. However, the majority of these compounds, with the consistent exception of zinc, are
mostly found associated with the particulate solids in stormwaters and are thus relatively easily removed
through sedimentation practices. Filterable forms of the metals may also be removed by either sediment
adsorption or are organically complexed with other particulates.
D-8
-------
In general, studies of recharge basins receiving large metal loads found that most of the heavy metals are
removed either in the basin sediment or in the vadose zone. Dissolved metal ions are removed from
stormwater during infiltration mostly by adsorption onto the near-surface particles in the vadose zone,
while the particulate metals are filtered out at the soil surface. Studies at recharge basins found that lead,
zinc, cadmium, and copper accumulated at the soil surface with little downward movement over many
years. However, nickel, chromium, and zinc concentrations have exceeded regulatory limits in the soils
below a recharge area at a commercial site. Elevated groundwater heavy metal concentrations of aluminum,
cadmium, copper, chromium, lead, and zinc have been found below stormwater infiltration devices where
the groundwater pH has been acidic. Allowing percolation ponds to go dry between storms can be
counterproductive to the removal of lead from the water during recharge. Apparently, the adsorption bonds
between the sediment and the metals can be weakened during the drying period.
Similarities in water quality between runoff water and groundwater has shown that there is significant
downward movement of copper and iron in sandy and loamy soils. However, arsenic, nickel, and lead did
not significantly move downward through the soil to the groundwater. The exception to this was some
downward movement of lead with the percolation water in sandy soils beneath stormwater recharge basins.
Zinc, which is more soluble than iron, has been found in higher concentrations in groundwater than iron.
The order of attenuation in the vadose zone from infiltrating stormwater is: zinc (most mobile) > lead >
cadmium > manganese > copper > iron > chromium > nickel > aluminum (least mobile).
Salts
Salt applications for winter traffic safety is a common practice in many northern areas and the sodium and
chloride, which are collected in the snowmelt, travel down through the vadose zone to the groundwater
with little attenuation. Soil is not very effective at removing salts. Salts that are still in the percolation water
after it travels through the vadose zone will contaminate the groundwater. Infiltration of stormwater has led
to increases in sodium and chloride concentrations above background concentrations. Fertilizer and
pesticide salts also accumulate in urban areas and can leach through the soil to the groundwater.
Studies of depth of pollutant penetration in soil have shown that sulfate and potassium concentrations
decrease with depth, while sodium, calcium, bicarbonate, and chloride concentrations increase with depth.
Once contamination with salts begin, the movement of salts into the groundwater can be rapid. The salt
concentration may not decrease until the source of the salts is removed.
Recommendations to Protect Groundwater During Stormwater Infiltration
Table D-l is a summary of the pollutants found in stormwater that may cause groundwater contamination
problems for various reasons. This table does not consider the risk associated with using groundwater
contaminated with these pollutants. Causes of concern include high mobility (low sorption potential) in the
vadose zone, high abundance (high concentrations and high detection frequencies) in stormwater, and high
soluble fractions (small fraction associated with particulates which would have little removal potential
using conventional stormwater sedimentation controls) in the stormwater. The contamination potential is
the lowest rating of the influencing factors. As an example, if no pretreatment was to be used before
percolation through surface soils, the mobility and abundance criteria are most important. If a compound
was mobile, but was in low abundance (such as for VOCs), then the groundwater contamination potential
would be low. However, if the compound was mobile and was also in high abundance (such as for sodium
chloride, in certain conditions), then the groundwater contamination would be high. If sedimentation
pretreatment was to be used before infiltration, then much of the pollutants will likely be removed before
infiltration. In this case, all three influencing factors (mobility, abundance in stormwater, and soluble
fraction) would be considered important. As an example, chlordane would have a low contamination
potential with sedimentation pretreatment, while it would have a moderate contamination potential if no
pretreatment was used. In addition, if subsurface infiltration/injection was used instead of surface
percolation, the compounds would most likely be more mobile, making the abundance criteria the most
important, with some regard given to the filterable fraction information for operational considerations.
This table is only appropriate for initial estimates of contamination potential because of the simplifying
assumptions made, such as the likely worst case mobility measures for sandy soils having low organic
D-9
-------
content. If the soil was clayey and had a high organic content, then most of the organic compounds would
be less mobile than shown on this table. The abundance and filterable fraction information is generally
Table D-1. Groundwater Contamination Potential for Stormwater Pollutants (Source: Pitt, era/. 1996)
Nutrients
Pesticides
Other
organics
Pathogens
Heavy
metals
Salts
Compounds
nitrates
2,4-D
y-BHC (lindane)
malathion
atrazine
chlordane
diazinon
VOCs
1,3-dichloro-
benzene
anthracene
benzo(a)
anthracene
bis (2-
ethylhexyl)
phthalate
butyl benzyl
phthalate
fluoranthene
fluorene
naphthalene
penta-
chlorophenol
phenanthrene
pyrene
enteroviruses
Shigella
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa
protozoa
nickel
cadmium
chromium
lead
zinc
chloride
Mobility
(sandy/low
organic soils)
mobile
mobile
intermediate
mobile
mobile
intermediate
mobile
mobile
low
intermediate
intermediate
intermediate
low
intermediate
intermediate
low/inter.
intermediate
intermediate
intermediate
mobile
low/inter.
low/inter.
low/inter.
low
low
inter./very
low
very low
low/very low
mobile
Abundance
in storm-water
low/moderate
low
moderate
low
low
moderate
low
low
high
low
moderate
moderate
low/moderate
high
low
low
moderate
moderate
high
likely present
likely present
very high
likely present
high
low
moderate
moderate
high
seasonally
high
Fraction
filterable
high
likely low
likely low
likely low
likely low
very low
likely low
very high
high
moderate
very low
likely low
moderate
high
likely low
moderate
likely low
very low
high
high
moderate
moderate
moderate
low
moderate
very low
very low
high
high
Contamination
potential for
surface infill.
and no
pretreatment
low/moderate
low
moderate
low
low
moderate
low
low
low
low
moderate
moderate
low
moderate
low
low
moderate
moderate
moderate
high
low/moderate
low/moderate
low/moderate
low
low
low/moderate
low
low
high
Contamination
potential for
surface infill.
with sediment-
ation
low/moderate
low
IOW
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low?
low
moderate
low
low
low?
low
moderate
high
low/moderate
low/moderate
low/moderate
low
low
low
low
low
high
Contamination
potential for
sub-surface
inj. with
minimal
pretreatment
low/moderate
low
moderate
low
low
moderate
low
low
high
low
moderate
moderate
low/moderate
high
low
low
moderate
moderate
high
high
high
high
high
high
low
moderate
moderate
high
high
applicable for warm weather stormwater runoff at residential and commercial area outfalls. The
concentrations and detection frequencies would likely be greater for critical source areas (especially vehicle
service areas) and critical land uses (especially manufacturing industrial areas).
The stormwater pollutants of most concern (those that may have the greatest adverse impacts on
groundwaters) include:
• nutrients: nitrate has a low to moderate groundwater contamination potential for both surface
percolation and subsurface infiltration/injection practices because of its relatively low concentrations found
D-10
-------
in most stormwaters. However, if the stormwater nitrate concentration was high, then the groundwater
contamination potential would also likely be high.
» pesticides: lindane and chlordane have moderate groundwater contamination potentials for
surface percolation practices (with no pretreatment) and for subsurface injection (with minimal
pretreatment). The groundwater contamination potentials for both of these compounds would likely be
substantially reduced with adequate sedimentation pretreatment. Pesticides have been mostly found in
urban runoff from residential areas, especially in dry-weather flows associated with landscaping irrigation
runoff.
• other organics: 1,3-dichlorobenzene may have a high groundwater contamination potential for
subsurface infiltration/injection (with minimal pretreatment). However, it would likely have a lower
groundwater contamination potential for most surface percolation practices because of its relatively strong
sorption to vadose zone soils. Both pyrene and fltioranthene would also likely have high groundwater
contamination potentials for subsurface infiltration/injection practices, but lower contamination potentials
for surface percolation practices because of their more limited mobility through the unsaturated zone
(vadose zone). Others (including benzo(a)anthracene, bis (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, pentachlorophenol, and
phenanthrene) may also have moderate groundwater contamination potentials, if surface percolation with
no pretreatment, or subsurface injection/infiltration is used. These compounds would have low groundwater
contamination potentials if surface infiltration was used with sedimentation pretreatment. Volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) may also have high groundwater contamination potentials if present in the stormwater
(likely for some industrial and commercial facilities and vehicle service establishments). The other
organics, especially the volatiles, are mostly found in industrial areas. The phthalates are found in all areas.
The PAHs are also found in runoff from all areas, but they are in higher concentrations and occur more
frequently in industrial areas.
• pathogens: enteroviruses likely have a high groundwater contamination potential for all
percolation practices and subsurface infiltration/injection practices, depending on their presence in
stormwater (likely if contaminated with sanitary sewage). Other pathogens, including Shigella,
Pseudomonas aeruginosa, and various protozoa, would also have high groundwater contamination
potentials if subsurface infiltration/injection practices are used without disinfection. If disinfection
(especially by chlorine or ozone) is used, then disinfection byproducts (such as trihalomethanes or ozonated
bromides) would have high groundwater contamination potentials. Pathogens are most likely associated
with sanitary sewage contamination of storm drainage systems, but several bacterial pathogens are
commonly found in surface runoff in residential areas.
• heavy metals: nickel and zinc would likely have high groundwater contamination potentials if
subsurface infiltration/injection was used. Chromium and lead would have moderate groundwater
contamination potentials for subsurface infiltration/injection practices. All metals would likely have low
groundwater contamination potentials if surface infiltration was used with sedimentation pretreatment. Zinc
is mostly found in roof runoff and other areas where galvanized metal comes into contact with rainwater.
• salts: chloride would likely have a high groundwater contamination potential in northern areas
where road salts are used for traffic safety, irrespective of the pretreatment, infiltration or percolation
practice used. Salts are at their greatest concentrations in snowmelt and early spring runoff in northern
areas.
It has been suggested that, with a reasonable degree of site-specific design considerations to compensate for
soil characteristics, infiltration can be very effective in controlling both urban runoff quality and quantity
problems (EPA 1983a). This strategy encourages infiltration of urban runoff to replace the natural
infiltration capacity lost through urbanization and to use the natural filtering and sorption capacity of soils
to remove pollutants. However, potential groundwater contamination through infiltration of some types of
urban runoff requires some restrictions. Infiltration of urban runoff having potentially high concentrations
of pollutants that may pollute groundwater requires adequate pretreatment, or the diversion of these waters
D-ll
-------
away from infiltration devices. The following general guidelines for the infiltration of stormwater and other
storm drainage effluent are recommended in the absence of comprehensive site-specific evaluations:
• Dry-weather storm drainage effluent should be diverted from infiltration devices because of their
probable high concentrations of soluble heavy metals, pesticides, and pathogenic microorganisms.
• Combined sewage overflows should be diverted from infiltration devices because of their poor
water quality, especially high pathogenic microorganism concentrations, and high clogging potential.
• Snowmelt runoff should also be diverted from infiltration devices because of its potential for
having high concentrations of soluble salts.
• Runoff from manufacturing industrial areas should also be diverted from infiltration devices
because of its potential for having high concentrations of soluble toxicants.
• Construction site runoff must be diverted from stormwater infiltration devices (especially
subsurface devices) because of its high SS concentrations which would quickly clog infiltration devices.
• Runoff from other critical source areas, such as vehicle service facilities and large parking areas,
should at least receive adequate pretreatment to eliminate their groundwater contamination potential before
infiltration.
• Runoff from residential areas (the largest component of urban runoff from most cities) is
generally the least polluted urban runoff flow and should be considered for infiltration. Very little treatment
of residential area stormwater runoff should be needed before infiltration, especially if surface infiltration is
through the use of grass swales. If subsurface infiltration (French drains, infiltration trenches, dry wells,
etc.) is used, then some pretreatment may be needed, such as by using grass filter strips, or other surface
filtration devices.
All other runoff should include pretreatment using sedimentation processes before infiltration, to both
minimize groundwater contamination and to prolong the life of the infiltration device (if needed). This
pretreatment can take the form of grass filters, sediment sumps, wet detention ponds, etc., depending on the
runoff volume to be treated and other site specific factors. Pollution prevention can also play an important
role in minimizing groundwater contamination problems, including reducing the use of galvanized metals,
pesticides, and fertilizers in critical areas. The use of specialized treatment devices can also play an
important role in treating runoff from critical source areas before these more contaminated flows
commingle with cleaner runoff from other areas. Sophisticated treatment schemes, especially the use of
chemical processes or disinfection, may not be warranted, except in special cases, especially considering
the potential of forming harmful treatment by-products (such as THMs and soluble aluminum).
Most past stormwater quality monitoring has not been adequate to completely evaluate groundwater
contamination potential. The following list shows the parameters that are recommended to be monitored if
stormwater contamination potential needs to be considered, or infiltration devices are to be used. Other
analyses are appropriate for additional monitoring objectives (such as evaluating surface water problems).
In addition, all phases of urban runoff should be sampled, including stormwater runoff, dry-weather flows,
and snowmelt.
• Contamination potential:
- Nutrients (especially nitrates)
- Salts (especially chloride)
- VOCs (if expected in the runoff, such as from manufacturing industrial or
vehicle service areas, could screen for VOCs with purgable organic carbon, POC,
analyses)
- Pathogens (especially enteroviruses, if possible, along with other pathogens such as
Pseudomonas aentginosa, Shigella, and pathogenic protozoa)
D-12
-------
- Bromide and total organic carbon, TOC (to estimate disinfection by-product generation
potential, if disinfection by either chlorination or ozone is being considered)
- Pesticides, in both filterable and total sample components (especially lindane and
chlordane)
- Other organics, in both filterable and total sample components (especially 1,3
dichlorobenzene, pyrene, fluoranthene, benzo (a) anthracene, bis (2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate, pentachlorophenol, and phenanthrene)
- Heavy metals, in both filterable and total sample components (especially chromium,
lead, nickel, and zinc)
• Operational considerations:
- Sodium, calcium, and magnesium (in order to calculate the sodium adsorption ratio to
predict clogging of clay soils)
- Suspended solids (to determine the need for sedimentation pretreatment to prevent
clogging)
The Technical University of Denmark (Mikkelsen, et al. 1996a and 1996b) has been involved in a series of
tests to examine the effects of stormwater infiltration on soil and groundwater quality. They found that
heavy metals and PAHs present little groundwater contamination threat, if surface infiltration systems are
used. However, they express concern about pesticides which are much more mobile. Squillace, et al. (1996)
along with Zogorski, et al. (1996) presented information concerning stormwater and its potential as a
source of groundwater MTBE contamination. Mull (1996) stated that traffic areas are the third most
important source of groundwater contamination in Germany (after abandoned industrial sites and leaky
sewers). The most important contaminants are chlorinated hydrocarbons, sulfate, organic compounds, and
nitrates. Heavy metals are generally not an important groundwater contaminant because of their affinity for
soils. Trauth and Xanthopoulus (1996) examined the long-term trends in groundwater quality at Karlsruhe,
Germany. They found that the urban landuse is having a long-term influence on the groundwater quality.
The concentration of many pollutants have increased by about 30 to 40% over 20 years. Hiltter and
Remmler (1996) describe a groundwater monitoring plan, including monitoring wells that were established
during the construction of an infiltration trench for stormwater disposal in Dortmund, Germany. The worst
case problem expected is with zinc, if the infiltration water has a pH value of 4.
D-13
-------
Appendix E
Laboratory Procedures Used For MCTT Pilot-Scale Evaluations
E-l
-------
Contents
Contents : 2
Quality Assurance Objectives 3
QA Objectives 3
EPA-Approved or Other Validated Standard Methods 8
Nonstandard or Modified Methods 10
Calibration Procedures and Frequency 12
Approach to QA/QC 13
CALCULATION OF RESULTS 13
INTERNAL QC CHECKS 14
Calculation of data quality indicators 16
References 18
Attachment 1 19
DETERMINATION OF INORGANIC IONS BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY 19
UAB METHOD 300.0 19
Attachment 2 31
ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDES AND PCBs 31
UAB METHOD 608 31
Attachment 3 45
Base/Neutral and Acid Semi-volatile Compounds 45
UAB method 625 45
Standard Operating Procedure Supplement 76
1. Solid Phase Extraction of Organic Compounds 76
2. Summary 76
3. Description of Item 76
4. Calibration Interval 76
5. Standards Needed 77
6. Procedure 77
7 Calculations 77
8. Report 77
9. References 77
Attachment 4 .78
MICROTOX Screening Test 78
Standard Operating Procedure 78
Attachments 84
Particle Size Analysis 84
Standard Operating Procedure 84
Attachment 6 92
COLOR 92
EPA Method 110.3 (Spectrophotometric) 92
Attachment? 93
CONDUCTANCE 93
EPA Method 120.1 (Specific Conductance, ^mhos/cm at 25°C) 93
Attachments : : 96
HARDNESS, Total (mg/1 as CaCO3) 96
EPA Method 130.2 (Titrimetric, EDTA) 96
Attachment 9 101
pH 101
E-2
-------
EPA Method 150.1 (Electrometric) ....101
Attachment 10 104
RESIDUE, FILTERABLE 104
EPA Method 160.1 (Gravimetric, Dried at 180°C) 104
RESIDUE, NON-FILTERABLE ..106
EPA Method 160.2 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105°C) 106
RESIDUE, TOTAL 109
EPA Method 160.3 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105°C) 109
RESIDUE, VOLATILE Ill
EPA Method 160.4 (Gravimetric, Ignition at 550°C) Ill
Attachment 11 112
TURBIDITY 112
EPA Method 180.1 (Nephelometic) 112
Attachment 12.. 116
DETERMINATION OF TRACE ELEMENTS BY STABILIZED TEMPERATURE GRAPHITE FURNACE
ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROMETRY 116
UAB METHOD 200.9 : 116
Attachment 13 133
ALKALINITY 133
EPA Method 310.1 (Titrimetric, pH 4.5) 133
Attachment 14 137
CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND 137
EPA Method 410.4 (Colorimetric, Automated; Manual) 137
Attachment 15 140
Sample Flowcharts 140
MCTT Evaluation Flow Chart 141
Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart 142
On-Site Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart 143
Bench Scale Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart 144
Quality Assurance Objectives
QA Objectives
A very important aspect of any research is the assurance that the samples collected represent the
conditions to be tested and that the number of samples to be collected are sufficient to provide
statistically relevant conclusions. Because this research is interested in comparing paired data sets, an
experimental design process was used that estimates the number of needed sample pairs. The equation
used to estimate the needed number of samples (Cameron, undated) is as follows:
n — L
where a = false positive rate (1-a is the degree of confidence. A value of a of 0.05 is usually considered
statistically significant, corresponding to a 1-a degree of confidence of 0.95, or 95%)
p = false negative rate (l-P is the power. If used, a value of p of 0.2 is common, but it is frequently
ignored, corresponding to a p of 0.5)
E-3
-------
Zi-d = Z score (associated with area under normal curve) corresponding to 1-ot
Zi.p = Z score corresponding to 1-|3 value
fii = mean of data set one
(0.2 = mean of data set two
a = standard deviation (same for both data sets, same units as u. Both data sets are also assumed to be
normally distributed)
This equation is only approximate, as it requires that the two data sets be normally distributed and
have the same standard deviations. In most cases, stormwater constituent concentrations are more closely
log-normally distributed. However, if the coefficient of variation (COV) values are low (less than about
0.4), then there is probably no significant difference in the predicted sampling effort. Stormwater samples
are generally expected to have COV values of slightly greater values. Therefore, this equation is only
appropriate as an approximation. The statistical procedures to be used to evaluate this data (as described
in a following subsection) will calculate the exact degree of confidence of the pollutant reductions.
Figure 1 is a plot of this equation (normalized using COV and differences of sample means) showing
the approximate number of sample pairs needed for an a of 0.05 (degree of confidence of 95%), and a p
of 0.2 (power of 80%). This figure and the above equation demonstrate that 12 sample pairs will be
sufficient to detect significant differences (with at least a 50% pollutant reduction) for constituents having
coefficient of variations of no more than about 0.5.
Determining Sample Concentration Variations
Figure 2 (Pitt and Lalor 1997) can be used to estimate the COV value for a parameter by knowing
the 10th and 90m percentile ratios (the "range ratio"), assuming a log-normal distribution. This is used to
make initial estimates for COV that are needed to calculate the approximate number of samples that
actually need to be sampled and analyzed, hi many cases, the approximate range of likely concentrations
can be estimated for a parameter of interest. The extreme values are not well known, but the approximate
10th and 90th percentile values can be estimated with better confidence. As an example, the likely 10th
and 90th percentile values of fluoride in tap water can be estimated to be about 0.7 and 1.5 mg/L,
respectively. The resulting range ratio is therefore 1.5/0.7 = 2.1 and the estimated COV value is 0.25,
from Figure 2.
Also shown on Figure 2 is an indication of the location of the median value, compared to the 10th
percentile value and the range ratio. As the range ratio decreases, the median becomes close to the
midpoint between the 10th and 90th percentile values. Therefore, at low COV values, the differences
between normal distributions and log-normal distributions diminish. As the COV values increase, the
mean values are located much closer to the 10th percentile value. In log-normal distributions, no negative
concentration values are allowed, but very large positive " outliers" can occur. In the above example, the
median location is about 0.4, for a range ratio of 2.1. The following calculation shows how the median
value can be estimated using this "median location" value:
median location = 0.4 = (Xso-Xio)/(X9o-Xio)
therefore Xso-Xio= 0.4(X9o-Xio).
E-4
-------
(Xw-Xio) = 1.5 mg/L - 0.7 mg/L = 0.8 mg/L.
Therefore X50-Xio = 0.4 (0.8) = 0.32 mg/L,
and Xio = 0.7 mg/L, X50 = 0.32 mg/L + 0.7 mg/L = 1.0 mg/L.
c
CO
0
CD
100
80 -
2 60 -
0)
o
c
0)
Number of Sample Pairs Needed
(Power = 80% Confidence = 95%)
0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
40 —-
20 -
Coefficient of Variation
Figure 1. Sampling requirements for power of80% and confidence of 95%
E-5
-------
1.000
0.100:
0.010
Relative standard deviation
(standard dev./mean)
Median location
X50-X10)/(X90-X10)
10 100 1000
Range ratios (X90/X10)
1E4
Figure 2. Relationship between dau rangs and coefficient of variation
For comparison the average of the 10* and 90* percentile values is 1.1 mg/L. Because these two
values are quite close, the fluoride distribution is likely close to being normally distributed and the
equation shown previously can be used to estimate the required number of samples needed Pitt and
Lalor (1997) show how log transformations of real-space data descriptors (COV and median) can be used
in modifications of these equations.
Detection Limit Requirements
TW are a number of different types of detection limits defined for laboratory use. Most instrument
manufactures present a minimum readable value as the instrument detection limit (IDL) in their
specifications for simple test kits. The usual definition of IDL, however, is a concentration that produces
a S1?Tu0,n°lse,rauo of flve- T*16 method diction limit (MDL) is a more conservative value and is
established tor the complete preparation and analysis procedure. The practical quantification limit (POL)
is higher yet and is defined as a routinely achievable detection limit with a relatively good certainty that
any reported value is reliable. StandardMethxts (APHA, et aL 1989) estimates that the relationship between
these detection limits is approximately: IDL:MDL:PQL = 1:4:20. Therefore, the detection limit shown in
E-6
-------
much of the manufacturer's literature is much less than what would be used by most analytical
laboratones.
A quick (and conservative) estimate of the needed method detection limit (with at least a 90%
confidence) can be made by knowing only the median concentration and the concentration variation of
the contaminant, based on numerous Monte Carlo probability calculations presented by Pitt and Lalor
(1997):
Table 1, Monte Carlo values for MDL calculations
COV value
< 0.5 (low)
0.5 to 1.25 medium
> 1.25 (high)
Multiplier for MDL
0.8
0.23
0.12
As an example, if the contaminant has a low COV (<0.5), then the estimated required MDL is about
0.8 times the estimated median contaminant concentration. This MDL value would result in most
observations being in the "detectable" range.
Required Sample Analytical Precision
The precision (repeatability) of an analytical method is another important consideration in its
selection. Precision, as defined in Standard Methods (APHA, etaL 1992), is a measure of the closeness with
which multiple analyses of a given sample agree with each other. It is determined by repeated analyses of
a stable standard, conducting replicate analyses on the samples, or by analyzing known standard additions
to samples. Precision is expressed as the standard deviation of the multiple analysis results.
Figure 3 is a summary of probability plots prepared by Pitt and Lalor (1997) and indicates one
approach that can be used to calculate the needed analytical precision for a specific research objective.
This figure was prepared as an aid in resolving one percent contamination levels at a 90 percent
confidence level. This figure was developed for COV values ranging from 0.16 to 1,67, and indicates the
needed analytical precision (as a fraction of the uncontaminated flow's low concentration) to resolve one
percent contamination levels at a 90 percent confidence level. This figure was developed for
contamination levels between zero and 15 percent. If the analytical precision is worse than these required
values, then small contamination levels may not be detected. Therefore, even with adequate analytical
detection limits, poor analytical precision may not allow adequate identification of low levels of
contamination. As an example, if the median contaminant concentrations differ by a factor of 10 in two
flow components, but have high concentration variations (high COV values), a precision of between
0.015 to 0.03 of the lower baseflow median contaminant concentration is needed, for each percent
contamination that needs to be detected. If the median contaminant concentration in the cleaner
baseflow is 0.15 mg/L (with a corresponding contaminant median concentration of 10 times this amount,
or 1.5 mg/L, in the contaminating source flow), then the required analytical precision is about 0.015 X
0.15 = 0.002 mg/L to 0.03 X 0.15 = 0.005 mg/L per one percent contamination detection. If at least five
percent contamination is needed to be detected, then the minimum precision can be increased to 5 X
0.002 = 0.01 mg/L.
The method noted previously can be used to estimate the detection limit requirements for the above
example:
low COV in the cleaner baseflow: 0.8 X 0.15 mg/L = 0.12 mg/L
medium COV in the cleaner baseflow: 0.23 X 0.15 mg/L = 0.035 mg/L
E-7
-------
high COV in the cleaner baseflow: 0.12 X 0.15 mg/L = 0.018 mg/L.
The required analytical precision would therefore be about one-half of the lowest detection limit
needed, and about 1/12 of the largest estimated required detection limit. In most cases, the required
minimum precision (expressed as a COV) should be in the range of about 0.1 to 1, with the most
restrictive precision needed for constituents having low COV values (in order to have the additional
variability associated with analytical methods kept to an insignificant portion of the total variability of the
results).
E
o
•fj
c
0
o
L.
0
0)
TJ
-------
Table 2. Critical compound analytical methods
Class
Physical
Pesticides
SVOC
Metals
Cations
Anions
Toxicity
Compound
color
conductance
chemical oxygen demand
hardness
particle size
PH
turbidity
alkalinity
suspended solids
Lindane
Chlordane
1,3-dichlorobenzene
benzo(a) anthracene
bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate
fluoranthene
pentachlorophenol
phenanthrene
butyl benzyl phthalate
pyrene
copper
chromium
lead
zinc
nickel
sodium
calcium
magnesium
potassium
chloride
nitrate
sulfate
variable
Method
EPA 110.3
EPA 120.1
EPA 4 10.4
EPA 130.2
UABEEL1
EPA 150.1
EPA 180.1
EPA 3 10.1
EPA 160.3
Modified EPA 608
Modified EPA 608
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
Modified EPA 625
EPA 200.9
EPA 200.9
EPA 200.9
EPA 200.9
EPA 200.9
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
UAB EEL1
Attachment
6
7
14
8
5
9
11
13
10
2
2
o
j
•>
j
->
j
•^
j
•^
j
3
^>
j
3
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
'UAB Environmental Engineering Laboratory Method
E-9
-------
Table 3. Non-cntical compoundanalytical methods
Class
Physical
Pesticides
SVOC
Metals
Cations
Anions
Compound
dissolved solids
total solids
volatile solids
modified method 608
chlorinated pesticides
modified method 625 semi-
volatile compounds
cadmium
ammonium
lithium
fluoride
nitrite
phosphate
Method
EPA 160.1
EPA 160.3
EPA 160.4
Modified EPA 608
Modified EPA 625
EPA 200.9
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Modified EPA 300
Attachment
10
10
10
2
3
12
1
1
1
1
1
Nonstandard or Modified Methods
EPA method 300 is modified as follows:
For onions:
2.0 Summary" of Method
2.5 Samples are filtered through CIS and cation exchange columns prior to analysis to remove
interferences
For cations:
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the determination of the following inorganic cations:
lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, ammonium, magnesium,
2.0 Summary of Method
2.5 Samples are filtered through CIS and anion exchange columns prior to analysis to remove
interferences.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.2.2.1 Cation analytical column utilized is a Dionex Cation exchange column
EPA method 608 and 625 are modified as follows:
10. Sample Extraction
1. Samples are extracted using a separatory funnel technique. If emulsions prevent achieving acceptable
solvent recovery with separatory funnel extraction, continuous extraction is used. The separatory
funnel extraction scheme described below assumes a sample volume of 250 mL. The serial extraction
E-10
-------
of the base/neutrals uses 10 mL and 10 mL volumes of methylene chloride as does the serial
extraction of the acids. Prior to the extraction, all glassware is oven baked at 300 C.
2. A sample volume of 250 mL is collected in a 400 mL beaker and poured into a 500 mL separation
funneL For every twelve samples extracted, an additional four samples are extracted for quality
control and assurance. These include three 250 mL composite samples made of equal amounts of the
twelve samples and one 250 mL sample of reverse osmosis water. Standard solution additions
consisting of 25 uL of 1000 ug/mL base/neutral spiking solution, 25 uL of 1000 ug/mL
base/neutral surrogates, 12.5 uL of 2000 fig /mL acid spiking solution , and 12.5 uL of 2000 ug
/mL acid surrogates are made to the separation funnels of two of the three composite samples and
mixed well. Sample pH is measured with wide range pH paper and adjusted to pH > 11 with sodium
hydroxide solution.
3. A 10 mL volume of methylene chloride is added to the separatory funnel and sealed by capping. The
separatory funnel is gendy shaken by hand for 15s and vented to release pressure. The cap is
removed from die separatory funnel and replaced with a vented snorkel stopper. The separatory
funnel is then placed on a mechanical shaker and shaken for 2 min. After returning the separatory
funnel to its stand and replacing the snorkel stopper with cap, the organic layer is allowed to separate
from the water phase for a minimum of 10 minutes, longer if an emulsion develops. The extract and
any emulsion present is then collected into a 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
4. A second 10 mL volume of methylene chloride is added to the separatory funnel and the extraction
mediod is repeated, combining the extract with the previous in the Erlenmeyer flask. For persistent
emulsions, those with emulsion interface between layers more than one-third the volume of the
solvent layer, the extract including the emulsion is poured into a 50 mL centrifuge vial, capped, and
centrifuged at 2000 rpm for 2 min. to break die emulsion. Water phase separated in by centrifuge is
collected from me vial and returned to the separatory funnel using a disposable pipette. The
centrifuge vial with the extract is recapped before performing die extraction of the acid portion.
5. The pH of the remaining sample in the separatory funnel is adjusted to pH < 2 using sulfuric acid. The
acidified aqueous phase is senally extracted two times with 10 mL aliquots of methylene chloride as
done in me previous base/neutral extraction procedure. Extract and any emulsions are again
collected in die 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
6. The base/neutral extract is poured from the centrifuge vial diough a drying column of at least 10 cm
of anhydrous sodium sulfate and is collected in a 50 mL beaker. The Erlenmeyer flask is rinsed widi
5 mL of methylene chloride which is then used to rinse the centrifuge vial and dien for rinsing the
drying column and completing the quantitative transfer.
7. The base/neutral extract is transferred into 50 mL concentration vials and is placed in an automatic
vacuum/centrifuge concentrator (Vacuum concentration is used in place of the Kuderna-Damsh
mediod). Extract is concentrated to approximately 0.5 mL.
8. The acid extract collected in the 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask is placed in die 50 mL centrifuge vial. Again,
if persistent emulsions persist, the extract is centrifuged at 2000 rpm for 2 min. Water is drawn from
die extract and discarded. Extract is poured through the 10 cm anhydrous sodium sulfate drying
column and collected in the 50 mL beaker as before. The Erlenmeyer flask is then rinsed with 5 mL
of methylene chloride which is then poured into die centrifuge vial and finally dirough die drying
column.
E-I
-------
9. The acid extract is then poured into the 50 mL concentration vial combining it with the evaporated
base/neutral extract. The combined extract is then concentrated to approximately 0.5 mL in the
automatic vacuum/centrifuge concentrator.
10. Using a disposable pipette, extract is transferred to a graduated Kudema-Danish concentrator.
Approximately 1.5 mL of methylene chloride is placed in the concentration vial for rinsing. This rinse
solvent is then used to adjust the volume of extract to 2.0 mL. Extract is then poured into a labeled
Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial and freezer stored until analysis.
Notes for method 608:
Under the alkaline conditions of the extraction step, oc-BHC, y-BHC, endosulfan I and II, and endrin
are subject to decomposition. Florisil cleanup is not utilized unless sample matrix creates excessive
background interference.
Calibration Procedures and Frequency
Calibration procedures for all methods are described in standard methods or the particular UAB
Environmental Engineering Laboratory method. All QA criteria for calibrations are met or are upgraded,
e.g., 5 point calibrations versus single point or 3 point calibrations.
E-12
-------
Approach to QA/QC
CALCULA TION OF RESUL TS
Statistical Approach for Reducing Data
MCTT Data Observations. Comparison tests will be made of inlet and outlet conditions in the
MCTT to determine the level of pollutant removal and the statistical significance of the
concentration differences. Tests of significance will rely mostly on the nonparametnc Wilcoxon
Signed Rank Test for paired data. The 12 sets of observations for each test parameter will be used for
the following six test groups:
1) inlet vs. gnt chamber outlet
2) inlet vs. main settling chamber outlet
3) inlet vs. final effluent
4) grit chamber outlet vs. main settling chamber outlet
5) grit chamber outlet vs. final effluent
6) main settling chamber outlet vs. final effluent
The Wilcoxon signed rank test is a nonparametric test that doesn't require assumptions
concerning the distribution of the data or residuals (Lehmann 1975). StatXact-Turbo (CYTEL,
Cambridge, MA) is a microcomputer program that computes exact nonparametric levels of
significance, without resorting to normal approximations. This is especially important for the
relatively small data sets that will be evaluated during this research. The significance test results (the a
value) will indicate the level of confidence that the two sets of observations are the same. In most
cases, an a level of less than 0.05 is used to signify significant differences between two set of paired
observations.
Even if the a level is significant (less than 0.05), the pollutant reduction may not be very
important. Therefore, a calculation to determine the level of pollutant reduction will also be made
using the microcomputer spreadsheet program Excel (Microsoft Corp.). Excel is the basic data base
system used in our laboratory. The pollutant reduction will be calculated using the following
conventional formula:
% reduction = 100 X (inlet-outlet)/inlet
The importance of the level of pollutant reductions will also be graphically presented using
grouped box plots indicating the range and variations of the concentrations at each of the four
sampling locations in the MCTT. These plots will be prepared using SigmaPlot Qandel, San Rafael,
CA). Overlaying line graphs, showing all 12 sets of observations may also be prepared using Excel.
Determination of Outliers
Analytical results less than the PQL or the MDL will be flagged, but the result (greater than the
IDL) will still be used in most of the statistical calculations. Results less than the IDL will be treated
as less than detectable values (LDV) and will be treated according to Berthouex and Brown (1994).
Generally, the statistical procedures will be used twice, once with the LDV equal to zero, and again
with the LDV equal to the IDL. Thi? procedure will determine if a significant difference in
conclusions would occur with handling the data in a specific manner.
E-13
-------
Unusually high values will be critically examined to identify any possible errors. In most cases,
the sample will also be re-evaluated, as described earlier. It is difficult to reject stormwater
constituent observations solely because they are unusually high, as stormwater can easily have wide
ranging constituent observations.
INTERNAL QC CHECKS
Several quality control activities occur as specified in standard methods, however, standard
methods for EPA 625 do not list several QC parameters. These parameters are listed in Table 4.
E-14
-------
Table 4. Internal quality control checks
Tuning
Requirement
Frequency
Criteria
Surrogates
Internal Standards
Spike
Frequency
Concentration
50 ng DFTPP
per extraction batch
per method
Phenol-d5
2-Fluorophertol
2,4,6-Tribromophenol
Nitrobenzene-d5
2-Fluorobiphenyi
p-Terphenyl
2-Chlorophenol-d4
1,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4
1,4-Dichlorobenzene-d4
Naphthalene-d8
Acenaphthene-d10
Phenanthrene-d10
Chrysene-d12
Perylene-d12
Matrix Spike
5% samples or greater
1 - 5x sample level for
QA monitoring
Criteria
Duplicate
Frequency
Criteria
Sample Analysis
Qualitative ID
IS Area
IS RRT
Surrogate Criteria
Quantitative
QC Check Sample
Frequency
Criteria
Surrogate Recoveries
Nitrobenzene-d5
2-Fluorobiphenyl
p-Terphenyl-d14
(25-50 ug/L)
Method % rec. limits
Matrix spike duplicate
5% samples or 1 per extraction batch (16)
Method % rec and RPD
RRT within +/-0.06 RRT
units of standard RRT
Ions >10% in std. present
in sample within +/-20% of
ion abundance in std.
-50 to +100% of cal. area
+/- 30 sec of Cal. RT
Method % rec. limits
Within calibration range
Performance Evaluation
Each study
EPA QC limits
34-114%
43- 116%
33-141 %
E-15
-------
Tuning
Phenol-d6
2-Fluorophenol
2,4,6-Tribromophenol
1 ,2-Dichlorobenzene-d4
2-Chlorophenol-d4
10-
21 -
10-
16-
33-
110%
110%
123 %
110%
110%
Calculation of data quality indicators
Precision
precision, when calculated from duplicate measurements:
(C, -C,)xlOO%
^- LL_—
72
RPD = relative percent difference
Ci = larger of the two observed values
Ci = smaller of the two observed values
if calculated from three or more replicates, use relative standard deviation (RSD) rather than
RPD:
RSD =
RSD = relative standard deviation
s = standard deviation
V = mean of replicate analyses
Accuracy
For measurements where matrix spikes are used:
%/?=100%x
%R = percent recovery
S = measured concentration in spiked aliquot
U = measured concentration in unspiked aliquot
CM = actual concentration of spike added
For situations where a standard reference material (srm) is used instead of or in addition to a
matrix spike:
E-16
-------
tf = 100%x
%R = percent recovery
Cm = measured concentration of srm
Csrm = actual concentration of srm
Method Detection Limit
MDL = method detection limit
s = standard deviation of replicate analyses
s = Student's t-value appropriate to a 99% confidence level and a standard deviation
estimate with n-1 degrees of freedom
(n-\ i-a=o 99> x
E-17
-------
References
APHA, AWWA, and WPCF. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.
18th edition. Water Environment Federation. Washington, D.C. 1992.
Berthouex, P.M. and L.C. Brown. Statistics for Environmental Engineers. Lewis Publishers.
Boca Raton. 1994.
Cameron, K. "Statistics Workshop." Seventh Annual Waste Testing and Quality Assurance
Symposium. U.S. EPA. SAIC Corp. undated.
Lehmann, E.L. Nonparametrics: Statistical Methods Based on Ranks. Holden-Day. San
Francisco. 1975.
Pitt, R., Field, R. "Hazardous and Toxic Wastes Associated with Urban Stormwater Runoff."
Proceedings 16th Annual RREL Hazardous Waste Research Symposium: Remedial Action,
Treatment, and Disposal of Hazardous Waste, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
Research and Development, Cincinnati, OH EPA/600/9-90-37 (NTIS PB91-148379). 1990.
Pitt, R., R. Field, M. Lalor, andM. Brown. "Urban Stormwater Toxic Pollutants: Assessment,
Sources, and Treatability." Water Environment Research. June 1995.
Pitt, R., S. Clark, and K. Partner. Potential Groundwater Contamination from Intentional and
Non-Intentional Stormwater Infiltration. U.S. EPA. Office of Research and Development.
EPA/600/14. PB94-165354. Cincinnati, Ohio. May 1994.
Pitt, R. and M. Lalor. Investigation of Inappropriate Pollutant Entries into Storm Drainage
Systems - A Demonstration/Research Report. U.S. EPA. Office of Research and Development.
Contracts No. 68-03-3255 and 68-C9-0033, and Cooperative Agreements No. CR-816862 and CR-
819573. Cincinnati, Ohio, to be published in 1997.
E-18
-------
Attachment 1
DETERMINATION OF INORGANIC IONS BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY
UAB METHOD 300.0
SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This method covers the determination of the following inorganic ions:
PART A. anions
fluoride, chloride, nkrate-N, nitrite-N, ortho-phosphate-P, sulfate
PART B. cations
lithium, sodium, potassium, ammonium, magnesium, calcium
1.2 The matrices applicable to this method are drinking water, surface water, mixed domestic and
industrial wastewaters, groundwater, reagent waters, solids (after extraction 11.7), and leachates
(when no acetic acid is used).
1.3 The single analyst Method Detection Limit (MDL defined in Sect. 3.2) for the above analytes
is listed in Tables 2 and 3. The MDL for a specific matrix or analyst may differ from those listed,
depending upon the nature of the sample and care utilized during analysis.
1.4 This method is recommended for use only by or under die supervision of analysts
experienced in the use of ion chromatography and in the interpretation of die resulting ion
chromatograms.
1.5 When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar samples for any of the above ions, ion
identification should be supported by the use of a fortified sample matrix covering the anions of
interest. The fortification procedure is described in Sect. 11.6.
1.6 Users of the method data should state the data quality objectives prior to analysis. Users of
the method must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this mediod, using the
procedures described in Sett. 9.0.
SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 A small volume of sample, typically 2 to 3 mL, is introduced into an ion chromatograph. The
ions of interest are separated and measured, using a system comprised of a guard column, analytical
column, suppressor device, and conductivity detector.
2.2 The main differences between Parts A and B are the separator columns, guard columns, and
sample preparation procedures. Sections 6.0 and 7.0 elicit the differences.
2.3 An extraction procedure must be performed to use this method for solids (See 11.7).
2.4 Limited performance-based method modifications may be acceptable provided they are fully
documented and meet or exceed requirements expressed in Sect. 9.0, Quality Control.
E-19
-------
DEFINITIONS
3.1 CALIBRATION BLANK (CB)~ A volume of reagent water fortified with the same matrix
as the calibration standards, but without the analytes, internal standards, or surrogate analytes.
3.2 CALIBRATION STANDARD (CAL)~ A solution prepared from the primary dilution
standard solution or stock standard solutions and the internal standards and surrogate analytes. The
CAL solutions are used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte concentration.
3.3 FIELD DUPLICATES (FD)~ Two separate samples collected at the same time and place
under identical circumstances and treated exactly the same throughout field and laboratory
procedures. Analyses of field duplicates indicate the precision associated with sample collection,
preservation and storage, as well as with laboratory procedures.
3.4 INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE CHECK SOLUTION (IPC)- A solution of one or
more method analytes, surrogates, internal standards, or other test substances used to evaluate the
performance of the instrument system with respect to a defined set of criteria.
3.5 LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK (LFB)~ An aliquot of reagent water or other blank
matrices to which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFB is
analyzed exactly like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the methodology is in control,
and whether the laboratory is capable of making accurate and precise measurements.
3.6 LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX (LFM)- An aliquot of an environmental
sample to which known quantities of the method analytes are added in the laboratory. The LFM is
analyzed exactly like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample matrix contributes
bias to the analytical results. The background concentrations of the analytes in the sample matrix
must be determined in a separate aliquot and the measured values in the LFM corrected for
background concentrations.
3.7 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK (LRB)- An aliquot of reagent water or other blank
rntrices mat are treated exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware, equipment, solvents,
reagents, internal standards, and surrogates that are used with other samples. The LRB is used to
determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in die laboratory environment, the
reagents, or the apparatus.
3.8 LINEAR CALIBRATION RANGE (LCR)- The concentration range over which the
instrument response is linear.
3.9 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS)- Written information provided by vendors
concerning a chemical's toxicity, health hazards, physical properties, fire, and reactivity data
including storage, spill, and handling precautions.
3.10 METHOD DETECTION LIMIT (MDL)-- The minimum concentration of an analyte that
can be identified, measured and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is
greater than zero.
3.11 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SAMPLE (PE)~ A solution of method analytes
distributed by the Quality Assurance Research Division (QARD), Environmental Monitoring
Systems Laboratory (EMSL- Cincinnati), U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio,
to multiple laboratones for analysis. A volume of the solution is added to a known volume of reagent
water and analyzed with procedures used for samples. Results of analyses are used by QARD to
E-20
-------
determine statistically the accuracy and precision that can be expected when a method is performed
by a competent analyst. Analyte true values are unknown to the analyst.
3.12 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE (QCS)» A solution of method analytes of known
concentrations that is used to fortify an aliquot of LRB or sample matrix. The QCS is obtained from
a source external to the laboratory and different from the source of calibration standards. It is used
to check laboratory performance with externally prepared test materials.
3.13 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTION (SSS)~ A concentrated solution containing one or
more method analytes prepared in the laboratory using assayed reference materials or purchased
from a reputable commercial source.
INTERFERENCES
4.1 Interferences can be caused by substances with retention times that are similar to and overlap
those of the ion of interest. Large amounts of an ion can interfere with the peak resolution of an
adjacent ion. Sample dilution and/or fortification can be used to solve most interference problems
associated with retention times.
4.2 The water dip or negative peak that elutes near, and can interfere with, the fluoride peak can
usually be eliminated by the addition of the equivalent of 1 mL of concentrated eluent (7.31OOX) to
100 mL of each standard and sample.
4.3 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in the reagent water, reagents,
glassware, and other sample processing apparatus that lead to discrete artifacts or elevated baseline in
ion chromatograms.
4.4 Samples that contain particles larger than 0.45 microns and reagent solutions that contain
particles larger than 0.20 microns require filtration to prevent damage to instrument columns and
flow systems.
4.5 Any ion that is not retained by the column or only slightly retained will elute in the area of
fluoride or lidiium and interfere. Known co-elution is caused by carbonate and other small organic
ions. At concentrations of fluoride and lithium above 1.5 mg/L, this interference may not be
significant, however, it is the responsibility of the user to generate precision and accuracy information
in each sample matrix.
4.6 The acetate amon elutes early during the chromatographic run. The retention times of the
anions also seem to differ when large amounts of acetate are present. Therefore, this method is not
recommended for leachates of solid samples when acetic acid is used for pH adjustment or
extraction.
4.7 The quantitation of unretained peaks should be avoided, such as low molecular weight
organic acids (formate, acetate, propionate etc .) which are conductive and co-elute with or near
fluoride and would bias the fluoride quantitation in some drinking and most waste waters.
4.8 Any residual chlorine dioxide present in the sample will result in the formation of additional
chlorite prior to analysis. If any concentration of chlorine dioxide is suspected in the sample purge
the sample with an inert gas (argon or nitrogen) for about five minutes or until no chlorine dioxide
remains.
E-21
-------
SAFETY
5.1 The toxicity or carcinogemcity of each reagent used in this method have not been fully
established. Each chemical should be regarded as a potential health hazard and exposure should be as
low as reasonably achievable. Cautions are included for known extremely hazardous materials or
procedures.
5.2 Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA regulations
regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) is available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis.
5.3 The following chemicals have the potential to be highly toxic or hazardous, consult MSDS.
5.3. ISulfuric acid (7.4)
Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Balance- Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to the nearest 0.000 Igm.
6.2 Sample preparation equipment consisting of vacuum apparatus to reproducibly perform solid
phase clean up with various columns: CIS to remove non-polar interferences, silica to remove polar
interferences, amon exchange to remove amon interferences, cation exchange to remove cation
interferences.
6.3 Ion chromatograph— Analytical system complete with ion chromatograph and all required
accessories including syringes, analytical columns, compressed gasses and detectors.
6.3.1 Guard column: A protector of the separator column. If omitted from the system the
retention times will be shorter. Usually packed with a substrate the same as that in the separator
column.
6.3.2 Analytical column: This column produces the separation shown in Figures 1 and 2.
6.3.3 Anion analytical column (Method A): Dionex ASA column (P/N 37041). An optional
column may be used if comparable resolution of peaks is obtained, and the requirements of Sect. 9.2
can be met.
6.3.4 Cation analytical column (Method B): Dionex column (P/N 37041). An optional column
may be used if comparable resolution of peaks is obtained, and the requirements of Sect. 9.2 can be
met.
6.3.5 Suppressor device: The data presented in this method were generated using a Dionex amon
or cation micro membrane suppressor (P/N 37106).
6.3.6 Detector- Conductivity cell: approximately 1.25 @L internal volume, (Dionex, or
equivalent) capable of providing data as required in Sect. 9.2.
6.3.7 The Dionex AI-450 Data Chromatography Software was used to generate all the data in the
attached tables. Systems using a strip-chart recorder and integrator or other computer based data
system may achieve approximately the same MDL's but the user should demonstrate this by the
procedure outlined in Sect. 9. 2.
E-22
-------
Reaqents and Standards
7.1 Sample bottles: Glass or polyethylene of sufficient volume to allow replicate analyses of
anions of interest.
1.2 Reagent water: Distilled or de-ionized water, free of the ions of interest. Water should
contain particles no larger than 0.20 microns.
7.3 Eluent solution (Method A and Method B): Sodium bicarbonate (CASRN 144-55-8) 1.7 mM,
sodium carbonate (CASRN 497-19-8) 1.8 mM. Dissolve 0.2856 gm sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)
and 0.3816 gm of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) in reagent water (7.2) and dilute to 2 L.
7.4 Regeneration solution, if necessary.
7.5 Stock standard solutions: Stock standard solutions are purchased as certified solutions from
Dionex Corportaion.
NOTE: Stability of standards: Stock standards (7.5) are stable for at least 1 month when stored
at 4°C. Dilute working standards should be prepared weekly, except those that contain nitrite and
phosphate should be prepared fresh daily.
Sample Collection, Preservation and Storage
8.1 Samples should be collected in plastic or glass bottles. All bottles must be thoroughly cleaned
and rinsed with reagent water. Volume collected should be sufficient to insure a representative
sample, allow for replicate analysis, if required, and minimize waste disposal.
8.2 Sample preservation and holding times for the ions that can be determined by this method
are as follows:
E-22
-------
Ion preservation and holding times
Analyte
Fluoride
Chloride
Nitrate- N
Combined (Nitrate/Nitrite)
Nitrite-N
O-Phosphate-P
Sulfate
Lithium
Sodium
Ammonium
Potassium
Magnesium
Calcium
Preservation
Holding Time
None required
None required
Cool to 4°C
cone. HjSCU to a pH < 2
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
Cool to 4°C
28 days
28 days
48 hours
28 days
48 hours
48 hours
28 days
28 days
28 days
48 hours
28 days
28 days
28 days
NOTE: If the determined value for the combined nitrate /nitrite exceeds 0.5 mg/L as N, a re-
sample must be analyzed for the individual concentrations of nitrate and nitrite.
8.3 The method of preservation and the holding time for samples analyzed by this method are
determined by the ions of interest. In a given sample, the ion that requires the most preservation
treatment and the shortest holding time will determine the preservation treatment. It is
recommended that all samples be cooled to 4°C and held for no longer than 28 days.
QUALITY CONTROL
9.1 Each analyst using this method is required to operate a formal quality control (QC) program.
The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of analyst capability,
and the periodic analysis of laboratory reagent blanks, fortified blanks and other laboratory solutions
as a continuing check on performance. The analyst is required to maintain performance records that
define the quality of the data that are generated.
INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF PERFORMANCE
9.2.1 The initial demonstration of performance is used to characterize instrument performance
(determination of LCRs and analysis of QCS) and laboratory performance (determination of MDLs)
prior to performing analyses by this method.
E-24
-------
9.2.2 Linear Calibration Range (LCR)-- The LCR must be determined initially and verified every
6 months or whenever a significant change in instrument response is observed or expected. The
initial demonstration of linearity must use sufficient standards to insure that the resulting curve is
linear. The verification of linearity must use a minimum of a blank and three standards. If any
verification data exceeds the initial values by ±10%, linearity must be reestablished. If any portion of
the range is shown to be nonlinear, sufficient standards must be used to clearly define the nonlinear
portion.
9.2.3 Quality Control Sample (QCS)- When beginning the use of this method, on a quarterly
basis or as required to meet data-quality needs, verify the calibration standards and acceptable
instrument performance with the preparation and analyses of a QCS. If the determined
concentrations are not within ±10% of the stated values, performance of the determinative step of
the method is unacceptable. The source of the problem must be identified and corrected before
either proceeding with the initial determination of MDLs or continuing with on-going analyses.
9.2.4 Method Detection Limit (MDL)- MDLs must be established for all analytes, using reagent
water (blank) fortified at a concentration of two to three times the estimated instrument detection
limit. To determine MDL values, take seven replicate aliquots of the fortified reagent water and
process through the entire analytical method. Perform all calculations defined in the method and
report the concentration values in the appropnate units. Calculate the MDL as follows:
MDL= (t) x (S)
where, t = Student's t value for a 99% confidence level and a standard deviation estimate with n-
1 degrees of freedom [t =3.14 for seven replicates].
S = standard deviation of the replicate analyses.
MDLs should be determined every 6 months, when a new operator begins work or whenever
there is a significant change in the background or instrument response.
9.3 ASSESSING ANALYST PERFORMANCE
9.3.1 Laboratory Reagent Blank (LRB)~ The analyst must analyze at least one LRB with each
batch of samples. Data produced are used to assess contamination from the laboratory environment.
Values that exceed the MDL indicate laboratory or reagent contamination should be suspected and
corrective actions must be taken before continuing the analysis.
9.3.2 Laboratory Fortified Blank (LFB)~ The analyst must analyze at least one LFB with each
batch of samples. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery (Sect. 9.4.2). If the recovery of any analyte
falls outside the required control limits of 90-110%, that analyte is judged out of control, and the
source of the problem should be identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
9.3.3 The analyst must use LFB analyses data to assess performance against the required control
limits of 90-110%. When sufficient internal performance data become available (usually a minimum
of 20- 30 analyses), optional control limits can be developed from the percent mean recovery (x) and
the standard deviation (S) of the mean recovery. These data can be used to establish the upper and
lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT =x + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT =x -3S
E-25
-------
The optional control limits must be equal to or better than the required control limits of 90-
110%. After each five to ten new recovery measurements, new control limits can be calculated using
only the most recent 20-30 data points. Also, the standard deviation (S) data should be used to
establish an on-going precision statement for the level of concentrations included in the LFB. These
data must be kept on file and be available for review.
9.3.4 Instrument Performance Check Solution (IPC)~ For all determinations the laboratory must
analyze the IPC (a midrange check standard) and a calibration blank immediately following daily
calibration, after every tenth sample (or more frequently, if required) and at the end of the sample
run. Analysis of the IPC solution and calibration blank immediately following calibration
must verify that the instrument is within ±10% of calibration. Subsequent analyses of the IPC
solution must verify the calibration is still within ±10%. If the calibration cannot be verified within
the specified limits, reanalyze the IPC solution. If the second analysis of the IPC solution confirms
calibration to be outside the limits, sample analysis must be discontinued, the cause determined
and/or in the case of drift, the instrument recalibrated. All samples following the last acceptable IPC
solution must be reanalyzed. The analysis data of the calibration blank and IPC solution must be kept
on file with the sample analyses data.
9.4 ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY AND DATA QUALITY
9.4.1 Laboratory Fortified Sample Matrix (LFM)- The analyst must add a known amount of
analyte to a minimum of 10% of the routine samples. In each case the LFM aliquot must be a
duplicate of the aliquot used for sample analysis. The analyte concentration must be high enough to
be detected above the original sample and should not be less than four times the MDL. The added
analyte concentration should be the same as that used in the laboratory fortified blank.
9.4.1.1 If the concentration of fortification is less than 25% of the background concentration of
the matrix the matrix recovery should not be calculated.
9.4.2 Calculate die percent recovery for each analyte, corrected for concentrations measured in
the unfortified sample, and compare these values to the designated LFM recovery range 90-110%.
Percent recovery may be calculated using the following equation:
R = (Q - q/s (100)
where, R = percent recovery, Cs = fortified sample concentration, C = sample background
concentration, s = concentration equivalent of analyte added to sample.
9. 4. 3 Until sufficient data becomes available (usually a minimum of 20 to 30 analyses), assess
laboratory performance against recovery limits of 80 to 120%. When sufficient internal performance
data becomes available develop control limits from percent mean recovery and the standard
deviation of the mean recovery.
9.4.4 If the recovery of any analyte falls outside the designated LFM recovery range and the
laboratory performance for that analyte is shown to be in control (Sea. 9.3), the recovery problem
encountered with the LFM is judged to be either matrix or solution related, not system related.
9. 4. 5 Where reference materials are available, they should be analyzed to provide additional
performance data. The analysis of reference samples is a valuable tool for demonstrating the ability to
perform the method acceptably.
E-26
-------
9.4.6 In recognition of the rapid advances occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted
certain options, such as the use of different columns and/or eluents, to improve the separations or
lower the cost of measurements. Each time such modifications to the method are made, the analyst is
required to repeat the procedure in Sect. 9.2.
9.4.7 It is recommended that the analyst adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with
this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory
and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to monitor the precision of the
sampling technique. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak in the chromatogram,
confirming techniques such as sample dilution and fortification, must be used. Whenever possible,
the analyst should perform analysis of quality control check samples and participate in relevant
performance evaluation sample studies.
9.4.8 At least quarterly, replicates of LFBs should be analyzed to determine the precision of the
laboratory measurements. Add these results to the on-going control charts to document data quality.
Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Establish ion chromatographic operating parameters equivalent to those indicated in Table
1.
10.2 For each analyte of interest, prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three
concentration levels and a blank by adding accurately measured volumes of one or more stock
standards (7.5) to a volumetric flask and diluting to volume with reagent water. If a sample analyte
concentration exceeds the calibration range the sample may be diluted to fall within the range. If this
is not possible then three new calibration concentrations must be chosen, two of which must bracket
the concentration of the sample analyte of interest. Each attenuation range of the instrument used to
analyze a sample must be calibrated individually.
10.3 Using injections of 0.1 to 1.0 mL (determined by injection loop volume) of each calibration
standard, tabulate peak height or area responses against the concentration. The results are used to
prepare a calibration curve for each analyte. During this procedure, retention times must be recorded.
10.4 The calibration curve must be verified on each working day, or whenever the ion eluent is
changed, and after every 20 samples. If the response or retention time for any analyte varies from the
expected values by more than ±10%, the test must be repeated, using fresh calibration standards. If
the results are still more than ±10%, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that analyte.
10.5 Nonlinear response can result when the separator column capacity is exceeded
(overloading). The response of the detector to the sample when diluted 1:1, and when not diluted,
should be compared. If the calculated responses are the same, samples of this total ionic
concentration need not be diluted.
Procedure
11.1 Tables 2 and 3 summarize the recommended operating conditions for the ion
chromatograph. Included in these tables are estimated retention times that can be achieved by this
method. Other columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the requirements
of Sea. 9.2 are met.
11.2 Check system calibration daily and, if required, re-calibrate as described in Sect. 10.
E-27
-------
11.3 Load and inject a fixed amount of well mixed sample. Flush injection loop thoroughly,
using each new sample. Use the same size loop for standards and samples. Record the resulting peak
size in area or peak height units. An automated constant volume injection system may also be used.
11.4 The width of the retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon
measurements of actual retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times
the standard deviation of a retention time can be used to calculate a suggested window size for each
anaryte. However, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of
chromatograms.
11.5 If the response for the peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the sample with
an appropriate amount of reagent water and reanalyze.
11.6 If the resulting chromatogram fails to produce adequate resolution, or if identification of
specific ions is questionable, fortify the sample with an appropriate amount of standard and
reanalyze.
NOTE: Retention time is inversely proportional to concentration. Nitrate and sulfate exhibit the
greatest amount of change, although all ions are affected to some degree. In some cases this peak
migration may produce poor resolution or identification.
11.7 The following extraction should be used for solid materials. Add an amount of reagent
water equal to ten times the weight of dry solid material taken as a sample. This slurry is mixed for
ten minutes using a magnetic stirring device. Filter the resulting slurry before injecting using a 0.45 |U
membrane type filter. This can be the type that attaches directly to the end of the syringe. Care
should be taken to show that good recovery and identification of peaks is obtained with the user's
matrix through the use of fortified samples.
11.8 Should more complete resolution be needed between peaks the eluent (7.3) can be diluted.
This will spread out the run but will also cause the later eluting ions to be retained longer. The analyst
mur determine to what extent die eluent is diluted. This dilution should not be considered a
deviation from the method.
DATA ANALYSIS AND CALCULATIONS
12.1 Prepare a calibration curve for each analyte by plotting instrument response against standard
concentration. Compute sample concentration by comparing sample response with the standard
curve. Multiply answer by appropriate dilution factor.
12.2 Report only those values that fall between the lowest and the highest calibration standards.
Samples exceeding the highest standard should be diluted and reanalyzed.
12.3 Report results in mg/L.
12.4 Report NOr as N, NO3- as N, FffCv as P.
METHOD PERFORMANCE
13.1 The following tables give the single laboratory MDL for each ion included in the method
under the conditions listed.
E-28
-------
An ion chramatographic conditions and detection limits in water
Analyte
fluoride
chloride
nitrite -N
nitrate-N
o-phosphate-P
sulfate
Peak#
1
2
3
4
5
6
Retention Time (min)
1.2
1.7
2.0
3.2
5.4
7.0
MDL (mg/L)
0.027
0.08
0.111
0.040
0.084
0.083
Standard Conditions:
Column, detector, and eluent as specified, pump rate 2.0 mL/min, sample loop 25 uL.
E-29
-------
Cation chmmatographic conditions and detection limits in water
Analyte
lithium
sodium
ammonium
potassium
magnesium
calcium
Peak#
1
2
3
4
5
6
Retention Time (min)
1.3
2.0
3.2
4.8
5.7
7.9
MDL (mg/L)
0.0138
0.454
0.123
0.081
0.055
0.318
Standard Conditions:
Column, detector, and eluent as specified, pump rate 1.0 mL/min, sample loop 25 uL.
REFERENCES
1. "Determination of Inorganic Disinfection By -Products by Ion Chromatography", J. Pfaff, C.
Brockhoff. J. Am. Water Works Assoc., Vol 82, No. 4, pg 192.
2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, Method 4 HOB, "Anions by
Ion Chromatography", 18th Edition of Standard Methods (1992).
3. Dionex, System DX-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual, Dionex Corp ., Sunnyvale,
California 94086, 1988.
4. Method Detection Limit (MDL) as described in "Trace Analyses for Wastewater," J. Closer,
D. Foerst, G. McKee, S. Quave, W. Budde, Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 15,
Number 12, page 1426, December, 1981.
5. American Society for Testing and Materials. Test Method for Anions in Water by Chemically -
Suppressed Ion Chromatography D4327- 91. Annual Book of Standards, Vol 11.01 (1993).
6. Code of Federal Regulations 40, Ch. 1, Pt. 136, Appendix B.
7. Hautman, D.P. & Bolyard, M. Analysis of Oxyhalide Disinfection Byproducts and other
Anions of Interest in Drinking Water by Ion Chromatography. Jour, of Chromatog ., 602, (1992), 65-
74.
E-30
-------
Attachment 2
ORGANOCHLORINE PESTICIDES AND PCBs
UAB METHOD 608
Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the determination of certain organochlorine pesticides. The following
parameters can be determined by this method:
Parameter Method detection limit (ug/L)
a-BHC 0.0081
6-BHC 0.0034
heptachlor 0.0067
P-BHC 0.0016
5-BHC 0.0086
aldrin 0.0475
heptachlor epoxide 0.0106
endosulfan I 0.0145
gamma chlordane 0.0027
alpha chlordane 0.0030
4,4'-dde 0.0259
dieldrin 0.0122
endrin 0.0078
4,4'-ddd 0.0065
endosulfan II 0.0046
4,4'-ddt 0.0314
endrin aldehyde 0.0465
endosulfan sulfate 0.0075
methoxychlor 0.0387
endrin ketone 0.0065
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic (GC) method applicable to the determination of the
compounds listed above in stormwater discharges. When this method is used to analyze unfamiliar
samples for any or all of the compounds above, compound identifications should be supported by at
least one additional qualitative technique. This method describes analytical conditions for a second
gas chromatographic column that can be used to confirm measurements made with the primary
column. UAB Method 625 provides gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer (GC/MS) conditions
appropriate for the qualitative and quantitative confirmation of results for all of the parameters listed
above, using the extract produced by this method.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL defined in Section 14.1)1 for each parameter is listed in
Table 1. The MDL for a specific wastewater may differ from those listed, depending upon the nature
of interferences in the sample matrix, and expenence of the analyst performing the procedure.
1.4 The sample extraction and concentration steps in this method are essentially the same as in
UAB Method 625. Thus, a single sample may be extracted to measure the parameters included in the
scope of each of these methods. When cleanup is required, the concentration levels must be high
enough to permit selecting aliquots, as necessary, to apply appropriate cleanup procedures. The
E-31
-------
analyst is allowed the latitude, under Section 12, to select chromatographic conditions appropnate for
the simultaneous measurement of combinations of these parameters.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the
use of a gas chromatograph and in the interpretation of gas chromatograms. Each analyst must
demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the procedure described
in Section 8.2.
Summary of Method
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 250 mL, is extracted with methylene chloride
using a separatory funnel. The methylene chloride extract is dried to a volume of 1 mL or less, then
volumetrically increased to 2.0 mL. The extract is separated by gas chromatography and the
parameters are then measured with an electron capture detector.2
2.2. The method provides a Flonsil column cleanup procedure and an elemental sulfur removal
procedure to aid in the elimination of interferences that may be encountered.
Interferences
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and
other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in gas
chromatograms. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from interferences
under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described in Section
8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously cleaned.3 Clean all glassware as soon as possible after use
by rinsing with the last solvent used in it. Solvent rinsing should be followed by detergent washing
with hot water, and rinses with tap water and distilled water. The glassware should then be drained
dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 °C for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable materials, such
as PCBs, may not be eliminated by this treatment. Solvent rinses with acetone and pesticide quality
hexane may be substituted for the muffle furnace heating. Thorough rinsing with sucli solvents
usually eliminates PCB interference. Volumetric ware should not be heated in a muffle furnace.
After drying and cooling glassware should be sealed and stored in a clean environment to prevent any
accumulation of dust or other contaminants. Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems.
Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
3.2 Interferences by phthalate esters can pose a major problem in pesticide analysis when using
the electron capture detector. These compounds generally appear in the chromatogram as large late
eluting peaks, especially in the 15 and 50% fractions from Florisil. Common flexible plastics contain
varying amounts of phthalates. These phthalates are easily extracted or leached from such materials
during laboratory operations. Cross contamination of clean glassware routinely occurs when plastics
are handled during extraction steps, especially when solvent-wetted surfaces are handled.
Interferences from phthalates can best be minimized by avoiding the use of plastics in the laboratory.
Exhaustive cleanup of reagents and glassware may be required to eliminate background phthalate
contamination.4'5 The interferences from phthalate esters can be avoided by using a
microcoulometric or electrolytic conductivity detector.
3.3 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample.
The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the
nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled. The cleanup procedures
E-32
-------
in Section 11 can be used to overcome many of these interferences, but unique samples may require
additional cleanup approaches to achieve the MDL listed in Table 1.
Safety
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method has not been precisely
defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this
viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever
means available. The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of OSHA
regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of
material data handling sheets is available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional
references to laboratory safety are available and have been identified6'8 for the information of the
analyst.
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known
or suspected, human or mammalian an carcinogens: 4,4'-DDT, 4,4'-DDD, the BHCs, and the PCBs.
Primary standards of these toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA
approved toxic gas respirator should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these
toxic compounds.
Apparatus and Materials
5.1 Sampling equipment, for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle-500 mL amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon. Foil
may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber botdes are not available,
protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or
methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.5.1.2 Automatic sampler
(optional)-The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at 4°C and protected from light
during composting. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum lengdi of compressible
silicone rubber tubing may be used. Before use, however, the compressible tubing should be
thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinsing with distilled water to minimize the
potential for contamination of the sample. An integrating flow meter is required to collect flow
proportional composites.
5-2 Glassware:
5.2.1 Separatory funnel-500 mL, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column-Chromatographic column, approximately 400 mm long x 19 mm ID, with
coarse frit filter disc.
5.2.3 Chromatographic column-400 mm long x 22 mm ID, with Teflon stopcock and coarse
frit filter disc
5.2.4 Concentrator tube, Kuderna-Danish-2.0-mL, graduated. Calibration must be checked at
the volumes employed in die test. Teflon-lined screwcap is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.2.5 Evaporative flask,
5.2.6 Vials-4-mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.3. Balance-Analytical, capable of accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
E-> ~»
-jj
-------
5.4. Gas chromatograph-An analytical system complete with gas chromatograph suitable for on-
column injection and all required accessories including syringes, analytical columns, gases, detector,
and strip-chart recorder. A data system is recommended-mended for measuring peak areas.
5.4.1 Column 1 - Supelco SPB-1701, 30 m length, 0.25u i.d.,
5.4.2 Column 2 - Supelco PTE-5, 30 m length, 0.25u i.d.,
5.4.3 Detector-Electron capture detector. This detector has proven effective in the analysis of
wastewaters for the parameters listed in the scope (Section 1.1), [sic] and was used to develop the
method performance statements in Section 14. Guidelines for the use of alternate detectors are
provided in Section 12.1.
5.5 Savant Vacuum Centrifuge for controlled evaporation of extraction solvent
Reagents
6.1 Reagent water-Reagent water is defined as a water in which an interferent is not observed at
the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)~ Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and
dilute to lOOmL.
6.3 Sodium thiosulfate-(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid (1 + l)-Slowly, add 50 mL to H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent
water.
6.5 Acetone, hexane, isooctane, [and] methylene chloride—Pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Ethyl ether-Nanograde, re-distilled in glass if necessary-
6.6.1 Ethyl ether must be shown to be free of peroxides before it is used as indicated by EM
Laboratories Quant test strips. (Available from Scientific Products Co., Cat. No. PI 126-8, and other
suppliers.)
6.6.2 Procedures recommended for removal of peroxides are provided with the test strips. After
cleanup, 20 mL of ethyl alcohol preservative must be added to each liter of ether.
6.7 Sodium sulfate—(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 °C for 4 h in a shallow
tray.
6.8 Florisil-PR grade (60/100 mesh). Purchase activated at 1250°F and store in the dark in glass
containers with ground glass stoppers or foil-lined screw caps. Before use, activate each batch at least
16 h at 130 °C in a foil-covered glass container and allow to cool.
6.9 Mercury-Triple distilled.
6.10 Copper powder-Activated.
6.11 Stock standard solutions (1.00 (j.g/uL)-Stock standard solutions can be prepared from
pure standard materials or purchased as certified solutions.
E-34
-------
6.11.1 Prepare stock standard solutions by accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure material.
Dissolve the material in methylene chloride and dilute to volume in a 10-mL volumetric flask. Larger
volumes can be used at the convenience of the analyst. When compound purity is assayed to be 96%
or greater, the weight can be used without correction to calculate the concentration of the stock
standard. Commercially prepared stock standards can be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an independent source.
6.11.2 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C
and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of
degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.11.3 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six mondis, or sooner if comparison with
check standards indicates a problem.
6.12 Quality control check sample concentrate-See Section 8.2.1.
6.13 Methylene chloride
Calibration
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating conditions equivalent to those given in Table 1.
The gas chromatographic system can be calibrated using the external standard technique (Section 7.2)
or the internal standard technique (Section 7.3).
7.2 External standard calibration procedure:
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each
parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask and
diluting to volume with methylene chloride. One of the external standards should be at a
concentration near, but above, the MDL (Table 1) and the other concentrations should correspond
to the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of
the detector.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 uL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12
and tabulate peak height or area responses against the mass injected. The results can be used to
prepare a calibration curve for each compound. Alternatively, if the ratio of response to amount
injected (calibration factor) is a constant over the working range (< 10% relative standard deviation,
RSD), linearity through the origin can be assumed and the average ratio or calibration factor can be
used in place of a calibration curve.
7.3 Internal standard calibration procedure-To use this approach, the analyst must select one or
more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The
analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of the internal standard is not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Because of these limitations, no internal standard can be suggested
that is applicable to all samples.
7.3.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentration levels for each
parameter of interest by adding volumes of one or more stock standards to a volumetric flask. To
each calibration standard, add a known constant amount of one or more internal standards, and
dilute to volume with methylene chloride. One of the standards should be at a concentration near,
but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to the expected range of
concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the detector.
E-35
-------
7.3.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 uL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 12
and tabulate peak height or area responses against concentration for each compound and internal
standard. Calculate response factors (RF) for each compound using Equation 1.
where:
As = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ais = Response for the internal standard.
Qs = Concentration of the internal standard (ug/L).
G = Concentration of the parameter to be measured (ug/L).
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (< 10% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be
invariant and the average RF can be used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to
plot a calibration curve of response ratios, A/Ais, vs. RF.
7.4 The working calibration curve, calibration factor, or RF must be verified on each working
day by the measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter
varies from the predicted response by more than ±15%, the test must be repeated using a fresh
calibration standard. Alternatively, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
7.5 The cleanup procedure in Section 1 1 utilizes Flonsil column chromatography. Flonsil from
different batches or sources may vary in adsorptive capacity. To standardize the amount of Flonsil
which is used, the use of launc acid value9 is suggested. The referenced procedure determines the
adso.ption from hexane solution of lauric acid (mg) per g of Florisil. The amount or Florisil to be
used for each column is calculated by dividing 1 10 by this ratio and multiplying by 20 g.
7.6 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a series of calibration
standards through the procedure to validate elution patterns and the absence of interferences from
the reagents.
Quality Control
8.1 Each analyst that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program.
The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory
capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The
analyst must maintain records to document the quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses
meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical
method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the
measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision with this method. This ability is established as described in Section
8.2.
E-36
-------
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted
certain options (detailed in Sections 10.4, 11.1, and 12.1) to improve the separations or lower the cost
of measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to
repeat the procedure in Section 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to
demonstrate that interferences from die analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time
a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a
safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The analyst must, on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of all samples
to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The analyst must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control
check standard that the operation of die measurement system is in control. This procedure is
described in Section 8.4. The frequency of the check stand-standard analyses is equivalent to 10% of
all samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all
specified quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The analyst must maintain performance records to document the quality of data that is
generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must
perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each single-
component parameter of interest at die following concentrations in acetone or methylene chloride:
4,4'-DDD, 10 ug/mL; 4,4'-DDT, 10 ug/ ml; endosulfanll.ilO ug/mL; endosulfan sulfate, 10
ug/mL; endrin, 10 ug/mL; any odier single-component pesticide, 2 ug/mL. If this method is only
to be used to analyze for PCBs, chlordane, or toxpahene, die QC check sample concentrate should
contain the most representative multi-component parameter at a concentration of 50 ug/mL in
acetone or mediylene chloride. The QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory in
Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that source, the QC check sample concentrate
must be obtained from another external source. If not available from either source above, die QC
check sample concentrate must be prepared by the laboratory using stock standards prepared
independendy from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipette, prepare QC check samples at die mid-point of the calibiation range by
adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze die well-mixed QC check samples according to die mediod beginning in Section
10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in ug/mL; and the standard deviation of the recovery
(s) in ug/mL, for each parameter using die four results.
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with die corresponding acceptance criteria for
precision and accuracy, respectively, found in Table 3 of EPA Mediod 608. If s and X for all
parameters of interest meet the acceptance cntena, the system performance is acceptable and analysis
of actual samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individual X falls
outside die range for accuracy, die system performance is unacceptable for diat parameter.
E-37
-------
NOTE: The large number of parameters in Table 3 present a substantial probability that one or
more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the
analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of
interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for those parameters that failed to meet
criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system. If
this occurs, locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all compounds of
interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The analyst must, on an ongoing basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from each sample
site being monitored to assess accuracy. For analysts analyzing one to ten samples per month, at least
one spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1.1 If, as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample
is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, the spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5
times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever
concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a
limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at the test concentration in Section 8.2.2 or 1 to 5
times higher than the background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever
concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g., maximum holding
times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if
any; or, if none (2) the larger of either 5 times higher than the expected background concentration or
the test concentration in Section 8.2.2.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each
parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for
the background Concentrations in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC
check sample concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each
parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100(A-B)%/T, where T is the known true value of
the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 3 of EPA Method 608. These acceptance criteria were calculated
to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations,
assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1. This error will be accounted for to the extent that the
analyst's spike to background ratio approaches 5:1.10 If spiking was performed at a concentration
lower than the test concentration in Section 8.2.2, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance
criteria in Table 3 EPA Method 608, or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the specific
spike concentration. To calculate optional acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter (1)
E-38
-------
Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation in Table 4 EPA Method 608, substituting the spike
concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall precision (S1) using the equation in Table 4 EPA Method
608, substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for recovery at the spike concentration as (100
X'/T)±2.44(100 S'/T)%.io
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed
the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed the criteria must be
analyzed as described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check
standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
NOTE: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the
number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of the sample matrix, and the
performance of the laboratory. If the entire list of parameters in Table 1 must be measured in the
sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of a QC check standard will be required is
high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of QC check sample concentrate
(Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs only to contain the
parameters that failed criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standards to determine the concentration measured (A) of each
parameter. Calculate each percent recovery (Ps) as 100 (A/T)%, where T is the true value of the
standard concentration.
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (Ps) for each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 3. Only parameters that failed the test in Section 8.3 need to be
compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter falls outside the designated range,
the analyst performance for that parameter is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that parameter in the unspiked sample
is suspect and may not be reported for compliance purposes.
8.5 As part of the QC program for the analyst, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be
assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in
Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of the percent
recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as a percent recovery interval from P-2sp to P+2s p. If
P=90% and sp=10%, for example, the accuracy interval is expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy
assessment for each parameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy
measurements).
8.6 It is recommended that the analyst adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with
this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend upon the needs of the laboratory
and the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess the precision of the
environmental measurements. When doubt exists over the identification of a peak on the
chromatogram, confirming techniques such as gas chromatography with a dissimilar column, specific
element detector, or mass spectrometer must be used. Whenever possible, the analyst should analyze
standard reference materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices11
should be followed, except that the bottle must not be pre-nnsed with sample before collection.
E-39
-------
Composite samples should be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the
requirements of the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as free as possible of Tygon
tubing and other potential sources of contamination.
9.2 All samples must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction.
If the samples will not be extracted within 72 h of collection, the sample should be adjusted to a pH
range of 5.0 to 9.0 with sodium hydroxide solution or sulfuric acid. Record the volume of acid or
base used. If aldrin is to be determined, add sodium thiosulfate when residual chlorine is present.
EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurement of residual chlorine.I2 Field test kits
are available for this purpose.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 14 days of collection and completely analyzed within
40 days of extraction.2
Sample Extraction
10.1 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample
volume. Pour the entire sample into a 0.5-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 10 mL of methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake 30 s to rinse the
inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the
funnel for 2 mm. with periodic venting to release excess pressure. Allow the organic layerto separate
from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more
than one-third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques to
complete the phase separation. The optimum technique depends upon the sample, but may include
stirring, filtration of the emulsion through glass wool, centnfugation, or other physical methods.
Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 125-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.3 Add a second 10-mL volume of methylene chloride to the sample bottle and repeat the
extraction procedure a second time, combining the extracts in the Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third
extraction in the same manner.
10.4 Pour the combined extract through a solvent-rinsed drying column containing about 10 cm
of anhydrous sodium sulfate, and collect the extract in the K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer
flask and column with 5 to 10 mL of methylene chloride to complete the quantitative transfer.
10.5 Transfer die extract to a pear shaped vacuum centrifuge flask. Place the flask in the
SAVANT vacuum centrifuge and run the solvent evaporation program on the SAVANT vacuum
centrifuge.
10.6 After the SAVANT run, remove the flask and rinse the flask and its lower joint into the
concentrator tube with 1 mL of methylene chloride. A disposable glass pippette is recommended for
this operation. Fill the concentrator tube to the 2 mL mark with methylene chloride. Stopper the
concentrator tube and store refrigerated if further processing will not be performed immediately. If
the extract will be stored longer than two days it should be transferred to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap
vial. If the sample extract requires no further cleanup, proceed with gas chromatographic analysis
(Section 12). If the sample requires further cleanup, proceed to Section 11.
10.7 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the sample bottle to the mark and
transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5
mL.
E-40
-------
Cleanup and Separation
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be necessary for a relatively clean sample matrix. If particular
circumstances demand the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst may use either procedure below or
any other appropriate procedure. However, the analyst first must demonstrate that the requirements
of Section 8.2 can be met using the method as revised to incorporate the cleanup procedure. The
Florisil column allows for a select fractionation of the compounds and will eliminate polar
interferences. Elemental sulfur, which interferes with the electron capture gas chromatography of
certain pesticides, can be removed by the technique described in Section 11.3.
11.2 Florisil column cleanup:
11.2.1 Place a weight of Florisil (nominally 1.0 g) predetermined by calibration (Section 7.5), into
a pesticide chromatographic column with stopcock. Tap the column to settle the Flonsil and add 1 to
2 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate to the top.
11.2.2 Add 10.0 mL of hexane to wet and rinse the sodium sulfate and Florisil. Just prior to
exposure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air, stop the elution of the hexane by closing the stopcock
on the chromatographic column. Discard the eluate.
11.2.3 Transfer the sample extract volume from the K-D concentrator tube onto the column
Rinse the tube twice with 1 to 2 mL of hexane, adding each rinse to the column.
11.2.4 Place a pear shaped SAVANT flask and under the chromatographic column. Drain the
column into the flask until the sodium sulfate layer is nearly exposed. Elute the column with 20.0 mL
of 6% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 1) at a rate of about 5 mL/min. Remove the SAVANT
flask and set it aside for later concentration. Elute the column again, using 20.0 mL of 15% ethyl
ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 2), into a second SAVANT flask. Perform a third elution using 20.0
mL of 50% ethyl ether in hexane (V/V) (Fraction 3).
11.2.5 Concentrate the fractions as in Section 10.5, and adjust the volume of each fraction to 2.0
mL with methylene chloride and analyze by gas chromatography (Section 12).
11.3 Elemental sulfur will usually elute entirely in Fraction 1 of the Flonsil column cleanup. To
remove sulfur interference from this fraction or the original extract, pipet 1.00 mL of the
concentrated extract into a clean concentrator tube or Teflon-sealed vial. Add one to three drops of
mercury and seal.13 Agitate the contents of the vial for 15 to 30 s. Prolonged shaking (2 h) may be
required. If so, this may be accomplished with a reciprocal shaker. Alternatively, activated copper
powder may be used for sulfur removal.14 Analyze by gas chromatography.
Gas Chromatography
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the MDL's that can be achieved under these conditions. Other packed
or capillary (open-tubular) columns, chromatographic conditions, or detectors may be used if the
requirements of Section 8.2 are met.
12.2 Calibrate die system daily as described in Section 7.
12.3 If the internal standard calibration procedure is being used, the internal standard must be
added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly immediately before injection into the gas
chromatograph.
12.4 Inject 2 to 5 uL of the sample extract or standard into the gas chromatograph using
splidess or solvent-flush technique.13 Smaller (1.0 uL) volumes may be injected if automatic devices
E-41
-------
are employed. Record the volume to the nearest 0.05 uL, the total extract volume, and the resulting
peak size in area or peak height units.
12,5 Identify the parameters in the sample by comparing the retention times of the peaks in the
sample chromatogram with those of the peaks in standard chromatograms. The width of the
retention time window used to make identifications should be based upon measurements of actual
retention time variations of standards over the course of a day. Three times the stand-standard
deviation of a retention time for a compound-pound can be used to calculate a suggested window
size; however, the experience of the analyst should weigh heavily in the interpretation of
chromatograms.
12.6 If the response for a peak exceeds the working range of the system, dilute the extract and
reanalyze.
12.7 If the measurement of the peak response is prevented by the presence of interferences,
further cleanup is required.
Calculations
13.1 Determine the concentration of individual compounds in the sample.
13.1.1 If the external standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the amount of material
injected from the peak response using the calibration curve or calibration factor determined in
Section 7.2.2. The concentration in the sample can be calculated from the equation below:
where:
A = Amount of material injected (ng).
V; = Volume of extract injected (|Ug/.L).
Vt = Volume of total extract (ug/.L).
Vs = Volume of water extracted (mL).
13. 1.2 If the internal standard calibration procedure is used, calculate the concentration in the
sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.3.2 and Equation 3.
Concentratio
io
^
g/ =
— ^
(AIS}(RF}(V0]
where:
As = Response for the parameter to be measured.
Ajs = Response for the internal standard.
Is = Amount of internal standard added to each extract (|J.g).
E-42
-------
V0 = Volume of water extracted (L).
13.2 When it is apparent that two or more PCB (Aroclor) mixtures are present, the Webb and
McCall procedure16 may be used to identify and quantify the Aroclors.
13.3 For multi-component mixtures (chlordane, toxaphene, and PCBs) match retention times of
peaks in the standards with peaks in the sample. Quantitate every identifiable peak unless
interference with individual peaks persist after cleanup. Add peak height or peak area of each
identified peak in the chromatogram. Calculate as total response in the sample versus total response
in the standard.
13.4 Report results in |ig/L without correction for recovery data. All QC data obtained should
be reported with the sample results.
Method Performance
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance
that can be measured and reported with 99% confidence that the value is above zero.l The MDL
concentrations listed in Table 1 were obtained using reagent water.17 Similar results were achieved
using representative wastewaters. The MDL actually achieved in a given analysis will vary depending
on instrument sensitivity, matrix effects, and analyst experience.
REFERENCES
1. 40 CFR Part 136, Appendix B.
2. "Determination of Pesticides and PCBs in Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters," EPA
600/4-82-023, National Technical Information Service, PB82-214222, Springfield, Virginia 22161,
April 1982.
3. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Preparation of
Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia.
4. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S., and Nef, G.S., "Sensitive Method for Determination of Phthalate
Ester Plasticizers in Open-Ocean Biota Samples," Analytical Chsrvstry, 47, 2225 (1975).
5. Giam, C.S., Chan, H.S. "Control of Blanks in the Analysis of Phthalates in Air and Ocean
Biota Samples," U.S. National Bureau of Standards, Special Publication 442, pp. 701-708, 1976.
6. "Carcinogens-Working With Carcinogens," Department of Health, Education, and Welfare,
Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health, Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
7. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29 CFR Part 1910), Occupational
Safety and Health Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised, January 1976).
8. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical Society Publication,
Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
9 . Mills, PA. "Variation of Florisil Activity; Simple Method for Measuring Absorbent Capacity
and Its Use in Standardizing Florisil Columns," Journal of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists,
51,29, (1968).
E-43
-------
10. Provost, L.P., and Elder, R.S. "Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data," American Laboratory,
15, 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 used in the equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22
derived in this report.)
11. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. "Standard Practices for Sampling
Water," American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
12. "Methods 330.4 (Titrimetric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric, DPD) for Chlorine,
Total Residual," Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
Ohio 45268, March 1979.
13. Goerlitz, D.F., and Law, L.M. Bulktinjor Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, 6,9 (1971).
14. "Manual of Analytical Methods for the Analysis of Pesticides in Human and Environmental
Samples," EPA-600/8-80-038, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Health Effects Research
Laboratory, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina.
15. Burke, JA. "Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,"
Journal of 'the Association of 'Official AnalyticalChemist. 48, 1037 (1965)-
16. Webb, R.G., and McCall, A.C. "Quantitative PCB Standards for Election Capture Gas
Chromatography," Journal of Cbrcrnatographic Science, 11, 366 (1973).
17. "Method Detection Limit and Analytical Curve Studies, EPA Methods 606, 607, and 608,"
Special letter report for EPA Contract 68-03-2606, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, June 1980.
18. "EPA Method Study 18 Method 608-Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs," EPA 600/4-84-
061, National Technical Information Service, PB84-211358, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June 1984.
E-44
-------
Attachment 3
Base/Neutral and Acid Semi-volatile Compounds
UAB method 625
Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the determination of a number of organic compounds that are
partitioned into an organic solvent and amenable to gas chromatography. The parameters listed in
Tables 1 and 2 may be qualitatively and quantitatively determined using this method.
1.2 Benzidine can be subject to oxidative losses during solvent concentration. Under the
alkaline conditions of extraction, a-BHC, y-BHC, endosulfan I and II, and endrin are subject to
decomposition. Hexachlorocyclopentadiene is subject to thermal decomposition in the inlet of the
gas chromatograph, chemical reaction in acetone solution, and photochemical decomposition. N-
nitrosodimethlyamine is difficult to separate from the solvent under the chromatographic conditions
described. N-mtrosodiphenylamine decomposes in the gas chromatographic inlet and cannot be
separated from diphenylamine.
1.3 This is a gas chromatographic/mass spectrometry (GC/MS) method2-u applicable to the
determination of compounds listed in Table 1 in municipal and industrial discharges
1.4 Due to routine and gross improvements in die mediod, the mediod detection limit (MDL,
defined in section 16.1)1 for each parameter is determined on a project specific basis. The MDL for a
specific wastewater may differ, depending on the nature of interferences in the sample matrix.
1.5 This method is restricted to use by or under the supervision of analysts experienced in the
use of a gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer and in the interpretation of mass spectra. Each
analyst must demonstrate the ability to generate acceptable results with this method using the
procedure described in Section 8.2.
Summary of Method
2.1 A measured volume of sample, approximately 0.25-L, is serially extracted with methylene
chloride at a pH greater than 11 and again at a pH less than 2 using a separatory funnel or a
continuos extractor.2 The mediylene chloride extract is dned, concentrated to a volume of 2 mL, and
analyzed by the GC/MS. Qualitative identification of the parameters in the extract is performed
using the SCAN mode of acquisition, retention time, and matching of acquired mass spectra to
standard mass spectral reference libraries. Quantitative analysis is performed using the SIM mode of
acquisition, internal standard techniques, and relative abundance of characteristic mA.
Interferences
3.1 Method interferences may be caused by contaminants in solvents, reagents, glassware, and
other sample processing hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines in the total
ion current profiles. All of these materials must be routinely demonstrated to be free from
interferences under the conditions of the analysis by running laboratory reagent blanks as described
in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize interference problems.
Purification of solvents by distillation in all-glass systems may be required.
E-45
-------
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused by contaminants that are co-extracted from the sample.
The extent of matrix interferences will vary considerably from source to source, depending upon the
nature and diversity of the industrial complex or municipality being sampled.
3.3 The base/neutral extraction may cause significantly reduced recovery of phenol, 2-
methylphenol, and 2,4-dimethylphenol. The analyst must recognize that results obtained under these
conditions are minimum concentrations.
Safety
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each reagent used in this method have not been precisely
defined; however, each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard. From this
viewpoint, exposure to these chemicals must be reduced to the lowest possible level by whatever
means available. The laboratory maintains a current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding
the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method. A reference file of material handling data
sheets is also available to all personnel involved in the chemical analysis. Additional references to
laboratory safety are available and have been identified4-6 for the information of the analyst.
4.2 The following parameters covered by this method have been tentatively classified as known
or suspected, human or mammalian carcinogens: benzo(a)anthracene, benzidene, 3,3'-
dichlorobenzidene, benzo(a)pyrene, a-BHC, (3-BHC, 5-BHC, y-BHC, dibenzo(a,h)anthracene, N-
nitrosodimethylamine, 4,4'-DDT, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Primary standards of these
toxic compounds should be prepared in a hood. A NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator
should be worn when the analyst handles high concentrations of these toxic compounds.
Apparatus and Materials
5.1 Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle~l-L or l-gt[5zc], amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined with Teflon.
Foil may be substituted for Teflon is the sample is not corrosive. If amber bottles are not available,
protect samples from light. The bottle and cap liner must be washed, rinsed with acetone or
methylene chloride, and dried before use to minimize contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)-The sampler must incorporate glass sample containers for
the collection of a minimum of 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated at
4°C and protected from light during composite procedures. If the sampler uses a peristaltic pump, a
minimum length of compressible silicone rubber tubing may be used, before [sic] use, however, the
compressible tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated rinses with
distilled water to minimize the potential for contamination of the sample. An integrated flow meter is
required to collect flow proportional composites.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are suggested. Catalog numbers are included for illustration
only.):
5.2.1 Separately funnel— 0.5-L, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Drying column-Chromatographic column, 19 mm ID, with coarse frit filter disc or glass
wool.
5.2.3 SAVANT Vacuum Centrifuge programmed to evaporate 45 mL extract to 2 mL utilizing
only vacuum, cold trap, and sample compartment controlled temperature not to exceed 40 ° C.
5.2.4 Evaporative flask, pear-shaped, to fit centrifuge
E-46
-------
5.2.5 Vials - 4 mL, amber glass, with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.6 Continues liquid-liquid extractor-Equipped with Teflon or glass connection joints and
stopcocks requiring no lubrication.
5.3 Boiling chips-Approximately 10/40 mesh. Heat to 400°C for 30 min of Soxhlet extract with
methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath or round-bottom heating mande- capable of temperature control ( ± 2°C). The
bath should be used in a hood.
5.5 Balance-Analytical, capable of accurately weighing O.OOOlg.
5.6 GC/MS system:
5.6.1 Gas Chromatograph-An analytical system complete with a temperature programmable gas
Chromatograph and all required accessories [sic] including syringes, analytical columns, and gases.
The injection port must be designed for splitless injection using capillary columns.
5.6.2 Capillary column for analysis of combined fraction of extract— HP-5, SP-5 or equivalent,
30 meter, WCOT type.
5.6.3 Capillary pre-column 1 meter length.
5.6.4 Capillary column connectors.
Reagents
6.1 Reagent water—reagent water is defined as a water in which an interference is not observed
at the MDL of the parameters of interest.
6.2 Sodium Hydroxide solution (10 N)-Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent water and
dilute to 100 mL.
6.3 Sodium Thiosulfate-(ACS) Granular.
6.4 Sulfuric acid (1+1) Slowly add 50 mL of H2SO4 (ACS, sp. gr. 1.84) to 50 mL of reagent
water.
6.5 Methanol, methylene chloride-pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.6 Sodium sulfate-(ACS) Granular, anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400°C for 4 h in a shallow
tray.
6.7 Stock standard solutions (1.00 ug/uL)-Standard solutions purchased as certified solutions.
6.7.1 Transfer the stock standard solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap bottles. Store at 4 °C
and protect from light. Stock standard solutions should be checked frequently for signs of
degradation or evaporation, especially just prior to preparing calibration standards from them.
6.7.2 Stock standard solutions must be replaced after six months, or sooner if comparison with
quality control check samples indicate a problem.
E-47
-------
6.8 DFTPP standard-Prepare a 25 ug/mL solution of DFTPP in methylene chloride.
6.9 Quality control check sample concentrate-See Section 8.2.1.
Calibration
7.1 Establish gas chromatographic operating parameters equivalent to those indicated Table 1.
7.2 Internal standard calibration procedure-To use this approach, the analyst must select three
or more internal standards that are similar in analytical behavior to the compounds of interest. The
analyst must further demonstrate that the measurement of internal standards is not affected by
method or matrix interferences. Use the base peak of m/z as the primary m/z for quantification of
standards. If interferences are noted, use one of the next two most intense m/z quantities for
quantification.
7.2.1 Prepare calibration standards at a minimum of three concentrations for each parameter of
interest by adding appropriate volumes of one or more standards to a volumetric flask. To each
calibration standard or standard mixture, add a known constant amount of one or more internal
standards, and dilute to a volume with mediylene chloride. One of the calibration standards should
be at a concentration near, but above, the MDL and the other concentrations should correspond to
the expected range of concentrations found in real samples or should define the working range of the
GC/MS system.
7.2.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 uL, analyze each calibration standard according to Section 13
and tabulate the area of the primary characteristic m/z against concentration for each compound and
internal standard. Calculate the response factors for each compound using the following equation:
KF (-
where:
As = Area of the characteristic m/z for the parameter to be measured.
Ais = Area of the characteristic m/z for the internal standard.
Qs = Concentration of the internal standard (ug/L).
Cs = Concentration of the parameter to be measured (jig/L).
If the RF value over the working range is a constant (< 35% RSD), the RF can be assumed to be
invariant and the average RF used for calculations. Alternatively, the results can be used to plot a
calibration curve of response ratios, As/A;s vs. RF.
7.3 The working calibration curve or RF must be verified on each working day by the measure
measurement of one or more calibration standards. If the response for any parameter varies from the
predicted response by ± 25 %, the test must be repeated using a fresh calibration standard.
Alternatively, a new calibration curve must be prepared for that compound.
Quality Control
8.1 Each analyst that uses this method is required to operate a formal quality control program.
The minimum requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory
E-48
-------
capability and an ongoing analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality. The
analyst must maintain records to document die quality of data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses
meet the performance characteristics of the method. When results of sample spikes indicate atypical
method performance, a quality control check standard must be analyzed to confirm that the
measurements were performed in an in-control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial, one-time, demonstration of ability to generate acceptable
accuracy and precision with diis method. This ability is established as described in Section 8.2.
8.1.2 In recognition of advances that are occurring in chromatography, the analyst is permitted
certain options (detailed in Sections 10.6 and 13.1) to improve the separations or lowerthe cost of
measurements. Each time such a modification is made to the method, the analyst is required to
repeat the procedure in 8.2.
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the analyst must analyze a reagent water blank to
demonstrate that interferences from the analytical system and glassware are under control. Each time
a set of samples is extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent water blank must be processed as a
safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The analyst must on an ongoing basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 5% of all samples
analyzed to monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality. This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The analyst must, on an ongoing basis, demonstrate through the analyses of quality control
check standards that the operation of die measurement system is in control. This procedure is
described in Section 8.4. The frequency of die check standard analyses is equivalent to 5% of all
samples analyzed but may be reduced if spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3) meet all specified
quality control criteria.
8.1.6 The analyst must maintain performance records to document the quality of data diat is
generated. This procedure is described in Section 8.5.
8.2 To establish the ability to generate acceptable accuracy and precision, the analyst must
perform the following operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample concentrate is required containing each parameter of
interest at a concentration of 100 (ig/mL in methylene chloride. Multiple solutions maybe required.
PCBs and multi-component pesticides may be omitted from this test. The QC check sample
concentrate must be obtained from the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If not available from that
source, the QC check sample concentrate must be obtained from anodier external source. If not
available from either source above, the QC check sample concentrate must be prepared by the
laboratory using stock standards prepared independendy from those used for calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipette, prepare QC check samples at a concentration of 100 ug/mL by adding
1.00 mL of QC check sample concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check samples according to the method beginning in Section
10 or 11.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X) in |ig/L, and the standard deviation of the recovery (s)
in ug/L, for each parameter using the four results.
E-49
-------
8.2.5 For each parameter compare s and X with the corresponding acceptance criteria for
precision and accuracy, respectively, found in Table 6 of EPA Method 625. If s and X for all
parameters meet the acceptance criteria, the system performance is acceptable and analysis of actual
samples can begin. If any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individual X falls outside the
range of accuracy, the system performance is unacceptable for that parameter.
NOTE: The large number of parameters in Table 1 present a substantial probability that one or
more will fail at least one of the acceptance criteria when all parameters are analyzed.
8.2.6 When one or more of the parameters tested fail at least one of the acceptance criteria, the
analyst must proceed according to Section 8.2.6.1 or 8.2.6.2
8.2.6.1 Locate and correct the source of the problem and repeat the test for all parameters of
interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.2.6.2 Beginning with Section 8.2.2, repeat the test only for diose parameters that failed to meet
the criteria. Repeated failure, however, will confirm a general problem with the measurement system.
If this occurs, locate and correct die source of the problem and repeat die test for all compounds of
interest beginning with Section 8.2.2.
8.3 The analyst must on an ongoing basis spike at least 5% of the samples form each sample site
being monitored to assess accuracy. For analysts analyzing 1 to 20 samples per month, at least one
spiked sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in die sample should be determined as follows:
8.3.1[szc] If as in compliance monitoring, the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample
is being checked against a regulatory concentration limit, die spike should be at that limit or 1 to 5
times higher man die background concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever
concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.2 If the concentration of a specific parameter in the sample is not being checked against a
limit specific to that parameter, the spike should be at least 100 ug/L or 1 to 5 times the background
concentration determined in Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would be larger.
8.3.1.3 If it is impractical to determine background levels before spiking (e.g. maximum holding
times will be exceeded), the spike concentration should be (1) the regulatory concentration limit, if
any; or, if none (2) the larger of eidier 5 times higher than the expected background concentration of
100 ug/L.
8.3.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to determine the background concentration (B) of each
parameter. If necessary, prepare a new QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.2.1) appropriate for
the background concentrations in the sample. Spike a second ample aliquot with 1.0 mL of the QC
check concentrate and analyze it to determine the concentration after spiking (A) of each parameter.
Calculate each percent recovery (P) as 100 (A-B)%/T where T is the known true value of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 6 of EPA Method 625. These acceptance criteria were calculated
to include an allowance for error in measurement of both the background and spike concentrations,
assuming a spike to background ratio of 5:1.7 If spiking was performed at a concentration lower than
100 ug/L, the analyst must use either the QC acceptance criteria in Table 6 (EPA Method 625), or
optional QC acceptance criteria calculated for the specific spike concentration. To calculate optional
E-50
-------
acceptance criteria for the recovery of a parameter (1) Calculate accuracy (X') using the equation in
Table 7 (EPA Method 625), substituting the spike concentration (T) for C; (2) calculate overall
precision (S') using the equation in Table 7, substituting X' for X; (3) calculate the range for
recovery at the spike concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100 S'/T)%7
8.3.4 If any individual P falls outside the designated range for recovery, that parameter has failed
the acceptance criteria. A check standard containing each parameter that failed must be analyzed as
described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If any parameter fails the acceptance criteria for recovery in Section 8.3, a QC check
standard containing each parameter that failed must be prepared and analyzed.
Note: The frequency for the required analysis of a QC check standard will depend upon the
number of parameters being simultaneously tested, the complexity of sample matrix, and the
performance of the analyst. If the entire list of single-component parameters in Table 6 must be
measured in the sample in Section 8.3, the probability that the analysis of the QC check standard will
be required is high. In this case the QC check standard should be routinely analyzed with the spike
sample.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by adding 1.0 mL of the QC check sample concentrate
(Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of reagent water. The QC check standard needs to only to contain the
parameters that failed the criteria in the test in Section 8.3.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to determine the concentration measured (A) of each
parameter. Calculate the percent recovery (P s) as 100(A/T)% where T is the true value of the of the
standard concentration..
8.4.3 Compare the percent recovery (P5) for each parameter with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 6 (EPA Method 625),. Only parameters that failed the test in
Section 8.3 need to be compared with these criteria. If the recovery of any such parameter falls
outside the designated range, the analysis is judged to be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified and corrected. The analytical result for that parameter in the unspiked sample
is suspect.
8.5 As part of the QC program for the analyst, method accuracy for wastewater samples must be
assessed and records must be maintained. After the analysis of five spiked wastewater samples as in
Section 8.3, calculate the average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of the percent
recovery (sp). Express the accuracy assessment as a percent interval from P-2sp to P+2s p. If P=90%
and sp= 10% for example, the accuracy interval is expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy
assessment for each parameter on a regular basis (e.g. after each five to ten new accuracy
measurements).
8.6 As a quality control check, the analyst must spike composite samples from an analytical
batch with the surrogate standard spiking solution as described in Section 10.2, and calculate the
percent recovery of each surrogate compound.
8.7 It is recommended that the analyst adopt additional quality assurance practices for use with
this method. The specific practices that are most productive depend on the needs of the analyst and
the nature of the samples. Field duplicates may be analyzed to the assess the precision of the
environmental measurements. Whenever possible, the analyst should analyze standard reference
materials and participate in relevant performance evaluation studies.
E-51
-------
Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in glass containers. Conventional sampling practices8 should
be followed, except that the bottle must not be pre-rinsed with sample before collection. Composite
samples should be collected in refrigerated glass containers in accordance with the requirements of
the program. Automatic sampling equipment must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing and other
sources of contamination.
9.2 All sampling must be iced or refrigerated at 4 °C from the time of collection until extraction.
Fill the sample bottles and if residual chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium thiosulfate per liter of
sample and mix well. EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for measurements of residual
chlorine.9 Field test kits are available for this purpose.
9.3 All samples must be extracted within 14 days of collection and completely analyzed within
40 days of extraction.
Separatory Funnel Extraction
10.1 Samples are usually extracted using separatory funnel techniques. If emulsions will prevent
achieving acceptable solvent recovery widi separatory funnel extractions, continues extraction
(Section 11) may be used. The separatory funnel extraction scheme described below assumes a
sample volume of 0.25 L. When sample volumes of 0.25 L are to be extracted, use 3-10 mL volumes
of methylene chloride for the serial extraction of the base/neutrals and 3-10 mL volumes of
methylene chloride for the acids. If emulsions prevent achieving acceptable solvent recovery with
separatory funnel extraction, continuous extraction is used.
10.2. A sample volume of 250 mL is collected in a 400 mL beaker and poured into a 500 mL
separation funnel. For every twelve samples extracted, an additional four samples are extracted for
quality control and assurance. These include three 250 mL composite samples made of equal
amounts of the twelve samples and one 250 mL sample of reverse osmosis water. Standard solution
additions consisting of 25 uL of 1000 ug/mL base/neutral matrix spiking solution, 25 uL of 1000
ug/mL base/neutral surrogates, 12.5 uL of 2000 ug /mL acid matrix spiking solution , and 12.5 uL
of 2000 fj.g /mL acid surrogates are made to the separation funnels of two of the three composite
samples and mixed well. Sample pH is measured with wide range pH paper and adjusted to pH > 11
with sodium hydroxide solution.
10.3. A 10 mL volume of methylene chloride is added to the separatory funnel and sealed by
capping. The separatory funnel is gently shaken by hand for 15s and vented to release pressure. The
cap is removed from the separatory funnel and replaced with a vented snorkel stopper. The
separatory funnel is then placed on a mechanical shaker and shaken for 2 min. After returning the
separatory funnel to its stand and replacing the snorkel stopper with cap, the organic layer is allowed
to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 minutes, longer if an emulsion develops. The
extract and any emulsion present is then collected into a 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.4. A second and third 10 mL volume of methylene chloride is added to the separatory funnel
and the extraction method is repeated, combining the extract with the previous in the Erlenmeyer
flask. For persistent emulsions, those with emulsion interface between layers more than one-third the
volume of the solvent layer, the extract including the emulsion is poured into a 50 mL centrifuge vial,
capped, and centrifuged at 2000 rpm for 2 min. to break the emulsion. Water phase separated by
centrifuge is collected from the vial and returned to the separatory funnel using a disposable pipette.
The centrifuge vial with the extract is recapped before performing the extraction of the acid portion.
10.5. The pH of the remaining sample in the separatory funnel is adjusted to pH < 2 using
sulfuric acid. The acidified aqueous phase is serially extracted three times with 10 mL aliquots of
E-52
-------
methylene chloride as done in the previous base/neutral extraction procedure. Extract and any
emulsions are again collected in the 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask..
10.6. The base/neutral extract is poured from the centrifuge vial though a drying column of at
least 10 cm of anhydrous sodium sulfate and is collected in a 50 mL beaker. The Erlenmeyer flask is
rinsed with 5 mL of methylene chloride which is then used to rinse the centrifuge vial and then for
rinsing the drying column and completing the quantitative transfer.
10.7. The base/neutral extract is transferred into 50 mL concentration vials and is placed in an
automatic vacuum/centrifuge concentrator (Vacuum concentration is used in place of the Kuderna-
Danish method). Extract is concentrated to approximately 0.5 mL.
10.8. The acid extract collected in the 125 mL Erlenmeyer flask is placed in the 50 mL centrifuge
vial. Again, if persistent emulsions persist, the extract is centrifuged at 2000 rpm for 2 min. Water is
drawn from the extract and discarded. Extract is poured through the 10 cm anhydrous sodium
sulfate drying column and collected in the 50 mL beaker as before. The Erlenmeyer flask is then
rinsed with 5 mL of methylene chloride which is then poured into the centrifuge vial and finally
through the drying column.
10.9. The acid extract is then poured into the 50 mL concentration vial combining it with the
evaporated base/neutral extract. The combined extract is then concentrated to approximately 0.5 mL
in the automatic vacuum/centrifuge concentrator.
10. Using a disposable pipette, extract is transferred to a graduated vial. Approximately 1.5 mL of
methylene chloride is placed in the extraction vial for rinsing. This rinse solvent is then used to adjust
the volume of extract to 2.0 mL. Extract is then poured into a labeled Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial
and freezer stored until analysis
Continuous Extraction
11.1 When experience with a sample from a given source indicates that a serious emulsion
problem will result or an emulsion is encountered using a separatory funnel as in Section 10, a
continues extractor should be used.
11.2 Mark the water meniscus on the side of the sample bottle for later determination of sample
volume. Check the pH of the sample with wide-range pH paper and adjust to pH> 11 with sodium
hydroxide solution. Transfer the sample to the continuous extractor and as in Section 10, add matrix
and surrogate standard spiking solutions and mix well. Add 60 mL of methylene chloride to the
sample bottle, seal, and shake for 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the extractor.
11.3 Repeat the sample bottle rinse with an additional 50 to 100 mL portion of methylene
chloride and add the rinse to the extractor.
11.4 Add 200 to 500 mL of methylene chloride to the distilling flask, add sufficient reageat
water to ensure proper operation, and extract for 24 h. Allow to cool, then detach the distilling flask.
Dry, concentrate, and seal the extract as in Section 10.
11.5 Charge a clean distilling flask 500 mL of methylene chloride and attach it to the continues
extractor. Carefully, while stirring, adjust the pH of the aqueous phase to less than 2 using sulfuric
acid. Extract for 24 h. Dry, concentrate, and seal the extract as in Sections 10.
E-53
-------
Daily GC/MS Performance Tests
12.1 At the beginning of each day that analyses are to be performed, the GC/MS system must
be checked out to see if acceptable performance criteria are performed for DFTPP.10
12.2 These performance tests require the following instrumental parameters:
Electron Energy: 70 V (nominal)
Mass Range: 35 to 450 amu
Scan Time: To give at least 5 scans per peak but not to exceed 7 s per scan.
12.3 DFTPP performance test-At the beginning of each day, inject 2 |iL (50 ng) of DFTPP
standard solution. Obtain a background-corrected mass spectra of DFTPP and confirm that all the
key m/z criteria in Table 9 (EPA Method 625) are achieved, the analyst must retune the mass
spectrometer and repeat the test until all criteria are achieved before any sampling, blanks, or
standards are analyzed. The tailing factor tests in Sections 12.4 and 12.5 may be performed
simultaneously with the DFTPP test.
12.4 Column performance test. At the beginning of each day the tailing factor must be
calculated, standard mixture containing Inject 50 ng of pentachlorophenol either separately or as part
of a standard mix that may contain DFTPP and calculate the tailing factor. The tailing factor for
pentachlorophenol must be less than 5. Replace the column, pre-column, or inlet, (as appropriate) if
the tailing factor criterion cannot be achieved.
Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometry
13.1 The following listing summarizes the recommended gas chromatographic operating
conditions
GC/MS Operating Parameters for selected ion monitoring
TOPLEVEL PARAMETERS
Method Information For: C:\HPCHEM\1\METHODS\BNASIM.M
Method Sections To Run:
( ) Save Copy of Method With Data
( ) Pre-Run Cmd/Macro =
(X) Data Acquisition
(X) Data Analysis
( ) Post-Run Cmd/Macro =
Method Comments:
Semivolatile BNA compounds quantitative analysis method
END OF TOPLEVEL PARAMETERS
ACQUISITION PARAMETERS
General Information
Inlet : GC
Tune File : DFTPP.U
E-54
-------
Acquisition Mode
Sim
MS Information
Solvent Delay
3.00 min
EM Absolute : False
EMV Offset : 0.0
Resulting Voltage : 3000.0
[Sim Parameters]
GROUP
Group
Dwell
1
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group
Ions
GROUP
Group
Dwell
Start Time
In Group
2
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group
Ions
GROUP
Group
Dwell
Start Time
In Group
3
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP
Group
Dwell
4
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group
Ions
GROUP
Group
Dwell
Start Time
In Group
5
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group
Ions
GROUP
Group
Dwell
Start Time
In Group
6
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group
Ions
Start Time
In Group
Group 1
150 msec.
No
3 .00
42.00 74.00 44.00
Group 2
150 msec.
No
5 .00
112.00 64.00 92.00
Group 3
14 msec.
No
6 .00
94.00 71.00 70.00 66.00
93.00 63.00 95.00 128.00
130.00 146.00 148.00 113.00
152.00 115.00 99.00
Group 4
14 msec.
No
7.00
146.00 148.00 113.00 45.00
77.00 43.00 70.00 130.00
201.00 199.00 82.00 128.00
77.00 123.00 65.00
Group 5
10 msec.
No
7 . 60
136.00 137.00 108.00 82.00
138.00 139.00 65.00 109.00
122.00 77.00 93.00 63.00
162.00 164.00 63. '00 180.00
145.00 128.00 102.00 129.00
Group 6
150 msec.
No
8.30
225.00 190.00 260.00
65 .00
64.00
150.00
121.00
117 .00
70 .00
39 .00
107 .00
95 .00
182 .00
GROUP 7
Group
Dwell
ID
Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group 7
150 msec.
: No
Group Start Time : 8.70
E-55
-------
j-una j.ii oj. uup
GROUP 8
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 9
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 10
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 11
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 12
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 13
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
-LU / . UU JL<±*i . UU
Group 8
28 msec.
No
9. 10
237.00 239.00
97.00 172.00
127.00 1S4.00
: Group 10
: 41 msec.
: No
: 10.00
:1S3.00 77.00
89.00 152.00
: Group 11
: 22 msec.
: No
: 10.50
: 164. 00 1S2.00
75.00 184.00
65.00 109.00
: Group 12
: 14 msec.
: No
: 11.25
:149.00 177.00
167.00 204.00
51.00 105.00
62.00 141.00
: Group 13
: 69 msec.
: No
: 12.25
:250.00 248.00
249.00
: Group 14
: 42 msec.
: No
: 12.90
: 188 . 00 189 . 00
264.00 178.00
/ / . uu
235.00 196.00 198.00
171.00 170.00 162.00
194.00 165.00 63.00
151.00 153.00
80.00 153,00 154.00
63.00 53.00 139.00
165.00 89.00
150.00 166.00 165.00
141.00 77.00 198.00
169.00 168.00 182.00
330.00
141.00 284.00 142.00
186.00 266.00 268.00
176.00 179.00
GROUP 14
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 15
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 16
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
: Group 15
: 150 msec.
: No
: 13.60
:167.00 139.00
165.00
: Group 16
: 150 msec.
: NO
: 14.50
:149.00 150.00 104.00
Group 17
69 msec.
E-56
-------
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
: No
: 15.20
:202.00
122.00
198.00 101.00 244.00 245.00
GROUP 17
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
: Group 18
: 150 msec.
: No
: 17.20
:149.00 91.00 206.00
GROUP 18
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 19
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 20
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
: Group 19
: 28 msec.
: No
: 18.20
:228.00 226
238.00 228
157.00 57
: Group 20
: 69 msec.
: No
: 19.50
:149.00 150.
250 . 00
: Group 2 1
: 69 msec.
: No
: 21.50
:264.00 265.
253 .00
.00
.00
. 00
.00
00
229.00
226.00
240.00 241.00
229.00 149.00
279.00 252.00 253.00
132.00 252.00 250.00
GROUP 21
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
GROUP 22
Group ID
Dwell Per Ion
Low Resolution
Group Start Time
Ions In Group
Group 22
150 msec.
No
23 .00
43.00 215.00 370.00
Group 23
69 msec.
No
25 .00
276.00 277.00
139.00
138.00 278.00 279.00
[Real Time Plot Parameters]
Time Window. : 27 min
Iconize Real Time Display :
Plot 1 type : Total ion
Scale minimum : 0
Scale maximum : 1000000
Plot 2 type : No plot
False
GC Inlet Information
[Inlet A Temperature Program Information]
Oven Track
Initial Temp.
Initial Time
Off
300 C
30.00 min
E-57
-------
Level Rate (C/min) Final Temp. (C) Final Time (min)
1 0
Total Program Time: 30.00 min
[Inlet B Temperature Program Information]
Oven Track : Off
Initial Temp. : 300 C
Initial Time : 30.00 min
Level Rate (C/min) Final Temp. (C) Final Time (min)
1 0
Total Program Time: 30.00 min
[Inlet A Pressure Program Information]
Constant Flow : On 0 kPa at 40 C
Pressure Units : kPa
[Inlet A Flow Settings]
Column length
Column diameter
Gas
Vacuum compensation
Pressure
Flow
Linear velocity
Split flow
30.00 m
0.250 mm
He
Off
0 kPa
0.0 ml/min
0.0 cm/sec
50 ml/min
[Inlet B Pressure Program Information]
Constant Flow : On 1 kPa at 40 C
Pressure Units : kPa
[Inlet t Flow Settings]
Column length
Column diameter
Gas
Vacuum compensation
Pressure
Flow
Linear velocity
30 .00 m
0.250 mm
He
On
1 kPa
0.5 ml/min
24.5 cm/sec
[Auxiliary Channel C Information]
Comment:
Pressure Program:
Initial Pres. : 0 kPa
Initial Time : 480.00 min
Level Rate(kPa/min) Final Pres.(kPa) Final Time (min)
I 0
Total Program Time: 480.00 min
[Auxiliary Channel D Information]
Comment:
Pressure Program:
E-58
-------
Initial Pres. : 0 kPa
Initial Time : 480.00 min
Level Rate(kPa/rain) Final Pres.(kPa) Final Time (min)
1 0
Total Program Time: 480.00 min
[Auxiliary Channel E Information]
Comment:
Pressure Program:
Initial Pres. : 0 kPa
Initial Time : 480.00 min
Level Rate(kPa/min) Final Pres.(kPa) Final Time (min)
1 0
Total Program Time: 480.00 min
[Auxiliary Channel F Information]
Comment:
Pressure Program:
Initial Pres. : 0 kPa
Initial,Time : 480.00 min
Level Rate(kPa/min) Final Pres.(kPa) Final Time (min)
1 0
Total Program Time: 480.00 min
GC Temperature Information
[GC Zone Temperatures]
Inj. A : 300 C
Inj. B : 300 C
Det. A : 300 C
Det. B : 300 C
Aux. : 280 C Off
[Oven Parameters]
Oven Equib Time
Oven Max
Oven
Cryo
Ambient
Cryo Blast
[Oven Program]
0.50 min
300 C
On
Off
25 C
Off
Initial Temp. : 40 C
Initial Time : 4.00 min
Level Rate (C/min) Final Temp. (C) Final Time (min)
1 35 .00 130 0.00
2 12.00 280 10.93
3 0.00
Next Run Time : 30.00 min
E-59
-------
Injector Information
Injection Source : Auto
Injection Location : Rear
Sample Washes 1
Sample Pumps 3
Sample Volume 2 stop(s)
Viscosity Delay 0 sec
Solvent A Washes 3
Solvent B Washes 3
On Column No
[Purge Information]
Purge A/B Init. Value On Time Off Time
A On 0.00 0.00
B Off 1.00 0.00
END OF ACQUISITION PARAMETERS
DATA ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
Method Name: C:\HPCHEM\1\METHODS\BNASIM.M
Percent Report Settings
Sort By: Signal
Output Destination
Screen: No
Printer: No
File: No
Integration Events: Meth Default
Generate Report During Run Method: No
Signal Correlation Window: 0.020
Qualitative Report Settings
Peak Location of Unkrown: Apex minus Start of Peak
Library to Search Minimum Quality
kp625.1 50
pripol.1 50
nbs49k.l
Integration Events: RTEINT.MAC
Report Type: Summary
Output Destination
Screen: No
Printer: No
E-60
-------
File: qual.txt
Generate Report During Run Method: No
Quantitative Report Settings
Report Type: Detailed (text only)
Output Destination
Screen: No
Printer: No
File: detail.xls
Generate Report During Run Method: Yes
Semivolatile BNA Compounds
Reference Window: 5.00 Percent
Non-Reference Window: 5.00 Percent
Correlation Window: 0.03 minutes
Default Multiplier: 1.05
Default Sample Concentration: 0.00
Compound Information
1) 1,4-DICHLOROBENZENE D4 (ISTD)
Ret. Time 6.86 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.36 to 7.36 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 150.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 152.00 55.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 115.00 36.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON ISTD cone: 100.000 uG/L
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
2) n-nitrosodimethylamine ( )
Ret. Time 3.37 min., Extract & Integrate from 2.87 to 3.87 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Dnc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 42.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 74.00 17.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 44.00 2.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
3) 2-fluorophenol ( )
Ret. Time 5.63 min., Extract & Integrate from S.13 to 6.13 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 112.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 64.00 43.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 92.00 49.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
4) phenol d6 ( )
E-61
-------
Ret. Time 6.63 min., Extract & Integrate from 5.13 to 7.13 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 99.00
Ql 71.00 104.90 20.0
Q2 70.00 38.20 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
5) phenol ( )
Ret. Time 6.65 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.15 to 7.15 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 94.00
Ql 66.00 120.40 20.0
Q2 65.00 85.80 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
6) bis(2-chloroethyl)ether ( )
Ret. Time 6.66 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.16 to 7.16 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 93.00
Ql 63.00 138.60 20.0
Q2 95.00 44.10 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
7) 2-chlorophenol ( )
Ret. Time 6.71 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.21 to
7.21 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 128.00
Ql 130.00 35.00 20.0
Q2 64,00 40.80 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
8) 1,3-dichlorobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 6.87 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.37 to
7.37 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 146.00
Ql 148.00 65.10 20.0
Q2 113.00 21.90 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT **+
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
9) 1,4-dichlorobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 6.87 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.37 to 7.37 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 146.00
Ql 148.00 65.10 20.0
Q2 113.00 21.90 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
10) 1,2-dichlorobenzene
E-62
-------
Ret. Time 6.87 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.37 to 7.37 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 146.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 148.00 65.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 113.00 21.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
11} bis(2-chloroisopropyl)ether ( )
Ret. Time 7.18 min., Extract t Integrate from 6.68 to 7.68 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 45.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 121.00 29.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 77.00 41.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
12) n-nitroso-di-n-propylamine ( )
Ret. Time 7.32 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.82 to 7.82 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 43.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 70.00 83.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 130.00 11.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
13) hexachloroethane ( )
Ret. Time 7.35 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.85 to 7.85 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 117.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 201.00 76.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 199.00 49.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
14) nitrobenzene d5 ( )
Ret. Time 7.43 min., Extract & Integrate from 6.93 to 7.93 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 82.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 128.00 39.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 70.00 63.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
15) nitrobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 7.44 min., Extract i Integrate from 6.94 to 7.94 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 77.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 123.00 19.30 20.0 **» METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 65.00 10.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
E-63
-------
16} NAPHTHALENE D8 (ISTD)
Ret. Time 8.17 min. , Extract 5c Integrate from 7.67 to 8.67 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 136.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 137.00 11.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 108.00 20.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON ISTD cone: 100.000 uG/L
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
17) isophorone ( )
Ret. Time 7.68 rain., Extract & Integrate from 7.18 to 8.18 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 82.00 *** METH DEFAULT **+
Ql 39.00 86.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 138.00 19.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
18) 2-nitrophenol ( )
Ret. Time 7.79 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.29 to 8.29 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 139.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 65.00 67.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 109.00 86.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
19) 2,4-dimethylphenol ( )
Ret. Time 7.85 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.35 to 8.35 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 107.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 122.00 56.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 77.00 36..40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
20) bis(2-chloroethoxy)methane ( )
Ret. Time 7.94 rain., Extract & Integrate from 7.44 to 8.44 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 93.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 63.00 221.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 95.00 54.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
21) 2,4-dichlorophenol ( )
Ret. Time 8.06 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.56 to 8.56 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 162.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 164.00 67.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 63.00 150.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
E-64
-------
22) 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 8.13 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.63 to 8.63 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. One.(rel) Integration
Tgt 182.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 180.00 102.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 145.00 43.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
23) naphthalene ( )
Ret. Time 8.19 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.69 to 8.69 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 128.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 102.00 27.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 129.00 13.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
24) hexachlorobutadiene ( )
Ret. Time 8.42 min., Extract & Integrate from 7.92 to 8.92 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 225.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 190.00 68.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 260.00 36.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
25) 4-chloro-3-methylphenol ( )
Ret. Time 8.96 min., Extract & Integrate from 8.46 to 9.46 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 107.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 142.00 67.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 77.00 90.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
26) hexachlorocyclopentadiene ( )
Ret. Time 9.38 min., Extract & Integrate from 8.88 to 9.88 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 237.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 239.00 64.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 235.00 69.60 20.0 ' *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
27) 2,4,6-trichlorophenol ( )
Ret. Time 9.51 min., Extract & Integrate from 9.01 to 10.01 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 196.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 198.00 87.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 97.00 72.90 20.0 *** MSTH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
E-65
-------
28) 2-fluorobiphenyl ( )
Ret. Time 9,60 min., Extract & Integrate from 9.10 to 10.10 rain.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Onc.(rel)
Tgt 172.00
Ql 171.00 38.90 20.0
Q2 170.00 32.90 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
29) 2-chloronaphthalene ( )
Ret. Time 9.74 min., Extract & Integrate from 9.24 to 10.24 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 152.00
Ql 127.00 42.60 20.0
Q2 164.00 35.70 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
30) ACENAPHTHENE D10 (ISTD)
Ret. Time 10.63 min., Extract & Integrate from 10.13 to 11.13 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 164.00
Ql 162.00 106.40 20.0
Q2 30.00 8.00 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON ISTD cone:
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
100.000 uG/L
31} diraethylphthalate
Ret. Time 10.30 mia., Extract
Integrate from 9.80 to 10.80 rain.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 163.00
Ql 77.00 25.30 20.0
Q2 194.00 9.30 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
32J 2,6-dinitrotoluene ( )
Ret. Time 10.39 min., Extract fc Integrate from 9.89 to 10.89 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rei)
Tgt 165.00
Ql 63.00 134.10 20.0
Q2 89.00 83.50 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
^ntegration
*»* METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
33) acenaphthylene ( )
Ret. Time 10.38 min.. Extract & Integrate from 9.88 to 10.83 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 152.00
Ql 151.00 25.50 20.0
Q2 153.00 12.60 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT »**
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
E-66
-------
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
34) acenaphthene ( )
Ret. Time 10.59 min., Extract & Integrate from 10.19 to 11.19 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 153.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 154.00 88.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 75.00 11.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
35) 2,4-dinitrophenol ( )
Ret. Time 10.79 min., Extract & Integrate from 10.29 to 11.29 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 184.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 63.00 73.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 53.00 88.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
36) 4-nitrophenol ( )
Ret. Time 10.69 min., Extract & Integrate from 10.19 to 11.19 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 139.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 65.00 70.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 109.00 39.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
37) 2,4-dinitrotoluene ( )
Ret. Time 11.05 min., Extract & Integrate from 10.55 to 11.55 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 165.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 89.00 92.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 63.00 137.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
38) PHENANTHRENE D10 (ISTD TR)
Ret. Time 13.29 min., Extract & Integrate from 12.79 to 13.79 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 188.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 189.00 15.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 186.00 8.50 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON ISTD cone: 100.000 uG/L
Curve Fit: Linear
39) diethylphthalate ( )
Ret. Time 11.52 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.02 to 12.02 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 149.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 177.00 14.00 20.0 *** MSTH DEFAULT ***
Q2 150.00 11.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
E-67
-------
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
40) fluorene ( )
Ret. Time 11.56 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.06 to 12.06 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 156.00
Ql 165.00 88.10 20.0
Q2 167.00 13.90 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
»** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
41) 4-chlorophenylphenylether ( )
Ret. Time 11.59 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.09 to 12.09 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 204.00
Ql 141.00 167.10 20.0
Q2 77.00 36.90 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
42) 2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol ( )
Ret. Time 11.76 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.26 to 12.26 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 198.00
Ql 51.00 83.70 20.0
Q2 105.00 40.10 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
43) n-nitrosodiphenylamine ( )
Ret. Time 11.82 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.32 to 12.32 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 169.00
Ql 168.00 66.00 20.0
Q2 167.00 41.60 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
44) azobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 11.87 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.37 to 12.37 min.
Signal
Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Integration
Tgt 77.00
Ql 51.00 98.30 20.0
Q2 182.00 20.40 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
45) 2,4,6-tribromophenol ( )
Ret. Time 12.03 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.53 to 12.53 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 62.00
Ql 141.00 168.60 20.0
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*»* METH DEFAULT ***
E-68
-------
Q2 330.00 104.70 20.0 : *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
46) 4-bromophenylphenylether ( )
Ret. Time 12.48 min., Extract & Integrate from 11.98 to 12.98 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. One.(rel) Integration
Tgt 250.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 248.00 110.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 141.00 115.90 20.0 ' *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit; Avg. RF
47) hexachlorobenzene ( )
Ret. Time 12.72 min., Extract & Integrate from 12.22 to 13.22 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 284.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 142.00 73.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 249.00 46.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
48) pentachlorophenol ( )
Ret. Time 13.10 min., Extract & Integrate from 12.60 to 13.60 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 266.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 268.00 72.70 20.0 ' *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 264.00 50.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
49) phenanthrene ( )
Ret. Time 13.33 min., Extract & Integrate from 12.83 to 13.83 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 178.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 176.00 20.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 179.00 14.60 20.0 ,'*** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
50) anthracene ( )
Ret. Time 13.33 min., Extract & Integrate from 12.83 to 13.83 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 178.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 179.00 14.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 176.00 20.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
51) carbazole ( )
Ret. Time 13.79 min., Extract & Integrate from 13.29 to 14.29 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 167.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
E-69
-------
Ql 139.00 29.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 165.00 2.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
52) di-n-butylphthalate ( )
Ret. Time 14.71 min., Extract & Integrate from 14.21 to 15.21 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 149.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 150.00 10.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 104.00 10.70 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
53) fluoranthene ( )
Ret. Time 15.70 min., Extract & Integrate from 15.20 to 16.20 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 202.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 101.00 2.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 198.00 3.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
54) pyrene ( )
Ret. Time 16.13 min.. Extract & Integrate from 15.53 to 16.63 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 202.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 198.00 4.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 101.00 2.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
55) 4-terphenyl d!4 ( )
Ret. Time 16.58 min., Extract & Integrate from 16.08 to 17.08 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 244.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 245.00 18.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 122.00 10.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
56) CHRYSENE D12 (ISTD)
Ret. Time 18.64 min., Extract & Integrate from 18.14 to 19.14 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 240.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 241.00 23.40 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 238.00 8.60 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON ISTD cone: 100.000 uG/L
Curve Fit: Linear
57) benzylbutylphthalate ( )
Ret. Time 17.72 min., Extract & Integrate from 17.22 to 18.22 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
E-70
-------
Tgt 149.00
Ql 91.00 51.20 20.0
Q2 206.00 10.10 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT'***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
58) benzo(a)anthracene ( )
Ret. Time 18.59 min., Extract & Integrate from 18.09 to 19.09 rain.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 228.00
Ql 226.00 28.60 20.0
Q2 229.00 19.40 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
59) chrysene ( )
Ret. Time 18.67 min., Extract & Integrate from 18.17 to 19.17 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Dnc.(rel)
Tgt 228.00
Ql 226.00 31.60 20.0
Q2 229.00 19.20 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
60) bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate ( )
Ret. Time 19.01 min., Extract & Integrate from 18.51 to 19.51 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 149.00
Ql 167.00 24.00 20.0
Q2 57.00 24.10 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
61) PERYLENE D12
(ISTD)
Ret. Time 21.95 min., Extract & Integrate from 21.45 to 22.45 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 264.00
Ql 265.00 25.50 20.0
Q2
132.00
10.60
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
20. 0
ISTD cone:
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT **
*** METH DEFAULT **
*** METH DEFAULT *"
100.000 UG/L
62) di-n-octylphthalate ( )
Ret. Time 20.33 min., Extract Sc Integrate from 19.83 to 20.83 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel)
Tgt 149.00
Ql 150.00 9.30 20.0
Q2 279.00 1.70 20.0
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
Integration
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
*** METH DEFAULT ***
63) benzo(b)fluoranthene ( )
Ret. Time 21.00 min., Extract & Integrate from 20.50 to 21.50 min.
E-71
-------
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 252.00 , *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 253.00 20.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 250.00 21.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
64) benzo(k)fluoranthene ( )
Ret. Time 21.00 min., Extiact & Integrate from 20.50 to 21.50 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 252.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 250.00 21.80 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 253.00 20.90 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
65) benzo (a) pyrene ( )
Ret. Time 21.78 min., Extract & Integrate from 21.28 to 22.28 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 252.00 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 250.00 23.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 253.00 21.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
66) coprostanol ( )
Ret. Time 24.24 min., Extract & Integrate from 23.74 to 24.74 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 43.00 «** METH DEFAULT ***
Ql 215.00 0.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 370.00 0.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Quadratic, forced through origin
67) indeno(1,2,3-c,d)pyrene ( )
Ret. Time 25.76 min., Extract & Integrate from 25.25 to 26.26 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 276.00 *** METH D3FAULT ***
Ql 277,00 16.10 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 138.00 4.00 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
68) dibenz(a,h)anthracene ( )
Ret. Time 25.93 mill.. Extract t Integrate from 25.43 to 26.43 min.
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc. (rel) Integration
Tgt 278.00 *** METH DEFAULT **«
Ql 279.00 24.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT ***
Q2 139.00 2.20 20.0 +** METH DEFAULT ***
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
69) benzo(g,h,i/perylene ( )
Ret. Time 26.83 min., Extract & Integrate from 26.33 to 27.33 min.
E-72
-------
Signal Rel Resp. Pet. Unc.(rel) Integration
Tgt 276.00 *** METH DEFAULT
Ql 138.00 5.30 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT
Q2 277.00 22.20 20.0 *** METH DEFAULT
Qualifier Peak Analysis ON
Curve Fit: Avg. RF
END OF DATA ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
13.2 After conducting the GC/MS performance tests in Section 12, calibrate the system daily as
described in Section 7.
13.3 The internal standard must be added to the sample extract and mixed thoroughly
immediately before it is injected into the instrument. This procedure minimizes losses due to
adsorption, chemical reaction, or evaporation.
13.4 Inject 2 to 5 |iL of the sample extract or standard into the GC/MS system using the
splidess or solvent flush technique.12 Smaller (1.0 uL) volumes may be injected if automatic devices
are employed. Record the volume injected to the nearest 0.05 |^L.
13.5 If the response for any m/z exceeds the working range of the GC/MS system, dilute the
extract and reanalyze.
13.6 Perform all qualitative and quantitative measurements as descnbed in Sections 14 and 15.
When the extracts are not being used for analyses, store them refrigerated at 4 °C, protected from
light in screw-cap vials equipped with unpierced Teflon-lined septa.
Qualitative Identification
14.1 Selected ion monitoring (SIM) is utilized for quantitative determinations. For qualitative
determinations, the GC/MS is operated in the Scan mode. Obtain EICPs for the primary m/z and
the two odier masses listed in Table 1. The following catena must be met to make a qualitative
identification:
14.1.1 The characteristic masses of each parameter of interest must maximize in the same or 1
scan from each other.
14.1.2 The retention time must fall with ±30 s of the retention time of the authentic compound.
14.1.3 The relative peak heights of the three characteristic masses in the EICPs must fall within
±20% of the relative intensities of these masses in a reference mass spectrum. The reference mass
spectrum can be obtained from a standard analyzed in the GC/MS system or from a reference
library.
14.2 Structural isomers that have very similar mass spectra and less than 30 s difference in
retention time, can be explicitly identified only if the resolution between the authentic isomers in a
standard mix is acceptable. Acceptable resolution is achieved if the baseline to the valley height
between the two isomers is less than 25% of the sum of the two peak heights. Otherwise, structural
isomers are identified as isomenc pairs.
E-73
-------
Calculations
15.1 When a parameter has been identified, the quantitation of that parameter will be based on
the integrated abundance from the EICP of the primary characteristic m/a in Tables 4 and 5. use the
base peaks of the m/z for internal and surrogate standards if the sample introduces interferences for
the primary m/z, use a secondary characteristic m/z to quantitate. Calculate the concentration in the
sample using the response factor (RF) determined in Section 7.2.2 and this equation:
(A ¥/ )
Concentraion(ag I L) = A
where:
As = Area of the characteristic m/z for the parameter or surrogate standard to be measured.
As = Area of the characteristic m/z for the internal standard.
Is = Amount of internal standard added to each extract (|J.g).
V0 = Volume of water extracted (L).
15.2 Report the results in Ug/L without correction for recovery data . Al QC data obtained
should be reported with the sample results.
Method Performance
16. 1 The method detection limit (MDL) is defined as the minimum concentration of a substance
that can be measured with 99% confidence that the value is above zero. l The MDL concentrations
are obtained using reagent water. 13 The MDL actually achieved in a given analysis will vary
depending on instrument sensitivity, matrix effects, and analyst experience.
16.2 The EPA 625 method has been tested using reagent water, drinking water, surface water,
and industrial wastewaters spiked at different concentrations over the range 5 to 1300 Ug/L.14 Single
operator precision, overall precision, and method accuracy were found to be directly related to the
concentrations of the parameter and essentially independent of sample matrix. Linear equations to
describe these relationships are presented in Table 7 of EPA Method 625. Attachment 1 to this
method illustrates recovery & precision for the UAB method utilizing composites of reagent water,
drinking water, surface water, and industrial wastewaters.
References
1. 40 CFR Part 136, Appendix B.
2. "Sampling and Analysis Procedures for Screening Industrial Effluents for Priority Pollutants,"
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory,
Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, March 1977, Revised April 1977. Available from Effluent Guidelines
Division, Washington, DC 20460.
3. ASTM Anmul Book of Standards, Part 31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices for Preparation of
Sample Containers for Preservation of Organic Constituents," American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia.
E-74
-------
4. "Carcinogens-Working with Carcinogens," Department of Health, Education, and Welfare,
Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health. Publication No. 77-206, August 1977.
5. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (29 CFR Part 1910), Occupational
Health and Safety Administration, OSHA 2206 (Revised January 1976).
6. "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical Society Publication,
Committee on Chemical Safety, 3rd Edition, 1979.
7. Provost, L.P. and Elder, R.S. "Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data," American Laboratory,
15 58-63 (1983). (The value 2.44 used in equation in Section 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 derived
in this report.)
8. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part 31, D3370-76. "Standard Practices for Sampling
Water, " American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia.
9. "Methods 330.4 (Titrametric, DPD-FAS) and 330.5 (Spectrophotometric , DPD) for Chlorine,
Total Residual," Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA-600/4-79-020, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
Ohio 45628, March 1979.
10. Eichelberger, J.W., Harris, L.E., and Budde, W.L. "Reference Compound to Calibrate Ion
Abundance Measurement in Gas Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry," Analytical Chenistry, 47, 995
(1975).
11. McNair, N.M. and Bonelli, E.J. "Basic Chromatography," Consolidated Printing. Berkeley,
California, p. 52, 1969.
12. Burke, J.A. "Gas Chromatography for Pesticide Residue Analysis; Some Practical Aspects,"
Journal of 'the Association of 'Ojfidal Analytical Chemists, 48, 1037 (1965).
13. Otynyk, P., Budde, W.L. and Eichelberger, J.W. "Method Detection Limit for Methods 624
and 625," Unpublished report, May 14, 1980.
14. "EPA Method Study 30, Method 625, Base/Neutrals, Acids, and Pesticides," EPA 600/4-
84-053, National Technical Information Service, PB84-206572, Springfield, Virginia 22161, June
1984.
E-75
-------
Standard Operating Procedure Supplement
1. Solid Phase Extraction of Organic Compounds
2. Summary
This SOP is for the extraction and concentration of semi-volatile compounds in the basic,
acidic and neutral categories. The usable range of concentrations are from 1 to 250 ug
per liter dependent on the individual compound. The matrix for samples prepared using
this SOP is limited to stormwater samples with less than 4 g/L solids. Expected precision
and accuracy are 25% precision (determined from replicate matrix spikes), and a range of
accuracy (as recovery ranging from detection to 125%) dependent on the particular
compound.
3. Description of Item
A Waters SepPak 3 mL syringe containing 500 mg Cig material bonded to a spherical
silica support sandwiched between Teflon or glass mat filters comprises the absorbent
material. A Vacuum Elution device (VacElut) holds the SepPak in place via a female luer
adapter. An adapter attached to the top of the SepPak holds a 100 mL reservoir above the
SepPak. The VacElut device also routes wastes and collects final elution volume in a
glass tube for future analysis.
4. Calibration Interval
Although the procedure does not require calibration, spikes for recovery and precision
determination are necessary every 30 samples. Since 12 samples can be extracted in one
batch run, 3 batches will result in a total of 36 extraction samples. The following pattern
of spikes are necessary:
Sample
Position
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Batch 1
RO water
composite
composite + semivolatile surrogates
& matrix spikes
composite + semivolatile surrogates
& matrix spikes
composite + pesticide surrogates &
matrix spikes
composite + pesticide surrogates &
matrix spikes
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
E-76
Batch 2
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
Batch 3
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
sample
-------
5. Standards Needed
a. Source - Surrogate and matrix spikes are available from various vendors. The
surrogates and matrix spikes are listed in the UAB QA document which lists method
descriptions - Quality Assurance Project Plan. Use spikes undiluted.
b. Preparation - Typically spiking solutions are 1000 to 2000 ug/mL. In order to obtain a
100 ug/L spike in a 250 mL sample from a 1000 ug/mL solution inject 25 uL of the
standard below the surface of the sample. For a 2000 ug/mL solution inject 12.5 uL.
6. Procedure
1. Empty VacElut reservoir.
2. Setup 12 collection tubes in VacElut device.
3. Setup 12 clean SepPaks with adapter and reservoir on VacElut device. Insure the
VacElut is in the waste position.
4. Turn on vacuum pump.
5. Wash the SepPaks with 5 mL HPLC grade methanol.
6. Wash the SepPaks with 5 mL RO water.
7. Load the samples into the reservoirs with vacuum on full. (*NOTE* - if vacuum
exceeds 30 inches Hg, bleed system and shut down pump, contact Dr. Parmer)
8. After full volume of sample has been eluted through SepPak, allow to dry with
vacuum on full for a minimum 20 minutes.
9. Switch VacElut to collect position and move to hood.
10. If there is any remaining water drops in sample container, add 1 gm sodium sulfate to
sample container to absorb the water.
11. Move all sample containers and VacElut device to hood.
12. Insure all collection tubes on VacElut are in collection vials.
13. Introduce 3 mL methylene chloride into each sample container. Swirl methylene
chloride to wash sample container walls and any sodium sulfate added.
14. Pour 3 mL methylene chloride wash into VacElut reservoir.
Note: This step should be accomplished using a maximum 5 inches Hg vacuum. If methylene chloride does not flow smoothly, the SepPak
cartridge is still wet. Increase vacuum and proceed, but note in extraction log that the SepPak elution with methylene chloride was
not smooth.
15. Transfer collected eluant to a labeled amber glass vial.
16. Store vial in freezer until analysis.
7 Calculations
Although there are no formal calculations associated with this procedure, have someone
else in the lab check your calculations for spike additions. All spikes should be at the 100
ug/L level.
8. Report
There are no formal reporting procedures associated with this SOP other than recording
samples extracted and composited in the extraction notebook.
9. References
To be added at a future date.
E-77
-------
Attachment 4
MICROTOX Screening Test
Standard Operating Procedure
Scope
Parameters Measured
The parameter measured during the Microtox Screening Procedure is the reduction of light
output by the sample at a specific time during the run, compared to a control sample.
Range
The Microtox Screening Procedure has a range of relative toxicities between 0 and 100% of light
output reduction.
Matrix
Sample matrix is water. The free/e-dried reagent is bacteria contained within milk solids. The
Reconstitution Solution, Diluent, and Osmotic Adjusting Solution are all sodium chloride in "pure"
water.
Expected precision and accuracy
Extensive research has been performed to establish precision and accuracy for runoff samples.
Please refer to A. Ayyoubi's Master's Thesis, "Physical Treatment of Urban Stormwater Runoff
Toxicants".
Terminology
Toxicity: For this method, bacterial metabolic reduction.
Relative toxicity: Percentage that reflects the reduction in light output by the bacteria in a sample
as compared to the light output by the bacteria in a control sample.
EC50 concentration: The fraction of sample, using the Microtox diluent as the dilution solution,
that causes a light output from the sample that is 50% of the light output of the control. Also called
the 50% effective concentration.
Summary of Method
The Microtox Screening Procedure uses a bioluminescent marine bacteria, Photokicterium
phosphomtn, to measure the toxicity of a sample relative to a control sample at three times during the
25-minute run. At each of the three reading times, the light output of each sample and each control is
measured on a chart recorder and is recorded as the height of the peak light output on a scale of 0 to
100.
Significance and Use
P. phospfxweum emit light as a byproduct of respiration. If a sample contains one or more
components that interfere with respiration, then the bacteria's light output is reduced proportionally
to the amount of interference with respiration, or toxicity. The light output reduction is proportional
to the toxicity of the sample. The relative toxicity of a sample to the control can then be calculated.
These relative toxicities can be compared to toxicity test results using standard reagents specified by
this procedure.
E-78
-------
Interferences
Samples having pH values outside the range of 6.3 to 7.8 may be toxic to the bacteria. Normally,
the pH of the sample is not adjusted because pH may be the parameter causing toxicity in a natural
environment. Color and turbidity will interfere with, and probably will reduce, the amount of emitted
light leaving the cuvette and reaching the photomultiplier. Organic matter may provide a second
food source for the bacteria and may result in a sample whose relative toxicity is calculated to be less
than zero.
Sample storage containers must be clean and free of soap residues, and stoppers must not be
made of cork. Detergents, cork and other materials may add chemicals to the sample and may add to
the toxicity of the sample.
Tap water and distilled water are fatal to the bacteria. Sample storage containers must be rinsed
with de-ionized or ultra-pure water pnor to use, with ultra-pure water being preferable.
Apparatus
Microtox 2055 Analyzer
500 uL pipettor (with disposable tips)
10 uL pipettor (with disposable tips)
Glass Cuvettes (Disposable)
Reagents and Materials
Microtox Bacterial Reagent
4% Photobacterium phosphoreum
2% Sodium Chloride
94% Skim Milk Solids
Microtox Reconstitution Solution
100% Ultra Pure Water
Microtox Diluent
2% Sodium Chloride
9 8% Ultra Pure Water
Microtox Osmotic Adjusting Solution
22% Sodium Chloride
78% Ultra Pure Water
Sodium Chloride (solid) - Reagent Grade
Hazards and Precautions
None of the Reagents and Materials have OSHA PEL(s), AGGIH TLV(s), or other limits. Oral
rat LD50 data has not been established for any of the reagents supplied by Microtox.
E-79
-------
Sodium chloride, which is one of the reagents and is a component of most of the reagents
supplied by Microtox, displays LD50 of 3000 mg/kg. The sodium chloride, either as a reagent or as a
component of the other reagents, may cause eye irritation and ingestion of large quantities may cause
vomiting, diarrhea and dehydration.
No special storage requirements are needed beyond keeping the freeze-dried bacteria culture in a
freezer. Reagents are not considered to be a fire or explosion hazard (water may be used to
extinguish if in a fire), and have no hazardous decomposition products. The reagents are stable under
ordinary conditions of use and storage. Spilled reagent, whether reacted or not, may be cleaned up by
adsorption with paper towels and excess fluid may be flushed down a regular sewer drain.
Sampling, Sample Preparation
Note: The Microtox instrument has space in its incubator for 15 cuvettes. For a normal
run, three of the cuvettes (Al, B1, and Cl) are reserved for the control solution. One of the
remaining twelve cuvettes is reserved for the standard solution whose concentration is approximately
the predetermined ZnSO4 7H2O EC50 concentration. The remaining eleven cuvettes contain the
samples to be tested.
1) Rinse clean 40 mL sample vials, vial caps and teflon septa with ultrapure water.
2) Mix the sample by inverting the container several times.
3) Pour 10 mL of sample into the vial.
4) Add 0.2 g NaCl (Reagent Grade) to the vial.
5) Mix die sample and salt by inverting the vial until the salt is completely dissolved.
Preparation of Apparatus
1) Discard the cuvettes remaining in the Incubator and Pre-Cool slots.
2) Put new cuvettes into the fifteen slots in the Incubator and one in the Pre-Cool
slot.
3) Pipette 1.0 mL of Diluent into the cuvettes in positions Al, Bl, and Cl.
4) Pipette 1.0 mL of Reconstitution Solution into a cuvette in the "Pre-Cool" position.
5) Pipette 1.0 mL of each sample into a cuvette in positions A2 through A5, B2
through B5, or C2 through C5.
6) Set the timer for 5 minutes to allow for temperature stabilization of the
Reconstitutior Solution.
7) Get a vial of the Microtox Reagent Bacteria out of the freezer. (Must be stored prior
to use in a freezer at no warmer than -20°C.
8) Tap the reagent vial on the countertop gently several times to break up the contents.
9) After the 5 minute temperature stabilization period has expired, open the vial.
10) Quickly, pour the Reconstitution Solution in the Pre-Cool slot into the reagent vial.
E-80
-------
11) Swirl the contents to mix (all solid reagent should go into solution).
12) Pour the reagent solution back into the Pre-Cool cuvette.
13) Mix the reagent solution approximately 20 times with a 500 uL pipette.
14) Set the timer for 15 minutes.
Calibration and Standardization
The Microtox Analyzer is calibrated using solutions of either zinc sulfate or phenol. A standard
solution of approximately 10 mg/L zinc sulfate or of approximately 50 mg/L phenol is made. Four
dilutions of the standard solution, with three replicates of each dilution, are used in place of the
twelve samples in the normal Microtox Screening Procedure. The four dilutions should bracket the
expected EC50 concentration of the standard solution.
During each run, one of the twelve sample positions is occupied by the standard solution at the
EC50 concentration. If the relative toxicity of the standard sample is outside the range of 45-55%,
the run is rejected and repeated with freshly made standard solution. If the EC50 on the repeat
agains falls outside the range of 45-55%, the calibration is repeated. If the calibrated EC50 is
significandy higher than the previous calibrations on that box of reagent, then a new box of reagent
is opened and the calibration Screening Procedure is performed on one of the reagents in that box.
Procedure
1) Pipette 10 (J.L of reagent solution into each cuvette in the following order Al, Bl,
Cl, A2 through A5, B2 through B5, and C2 through C5.
2) Gendy mix each cuvette's contents 20 times with a 500 )J.L pipette. Mix the cuvettes
in the same order in which reagent solution was added.
3) Push in the "HV" and "HV Check" buttons on the front of the Microtox analyzer.
The panel on the front should read between -700 and -800.
4) Push in the "HV Check" button (so it toggles back out) and push in the "Sensitivity
X10" and "Run" buttons.
5) Turn on the strip chart recorder.
6) Zero the chart recorder using the knob located on the right side of the machine.
7) Make sure the speed setting is for 1 inch per minute.
8) Make sure the pen is touching the recorder paper by putting the pen arm down.
9) Place the cuvette in Al into the turret and close the turret to get a reading on Al.
10) After the reading is obtained, remove the cuvette from the turret.
11) "Read" the cuvettes in Bl and Cl also to determine which of the three has the
largest reading. Place that cuvette back in the turret and close.
E-81
-------
12) Adjust the chart reading to between 90 and 100 using the Scan knob on the front of
the Analyzer. If display reads " 1" (not" 001"), change the sensitivity setting to
"Sensitivity XI".
13) Open the turret and check the zero point again on the chart recorder. Adjust as
necessary.
14) Close the turret.
15) Set the timer for 5 minutes.
16) When the timer rings, read the samples in the following order Al, Bl, Cl, Al
through A5, Bl through B5, Cl through C5, Al, Bl, and Cl.
17) Place the control cuvette (Al, Bl or Cl) which has the highest reading in the turret
and close.
18) Set the timer for 10 minutes.
19) When the timer rings, read the samples in the following orden Al, Bl, Cl, Al
through A5, Bl through B5, Cl through C5, Al, Bl and Cl.
20) Place the control cuvette (A 1, Bl, or Cl) which has the highest reading in the turret
and close.
21) Set the timer for 10 minutes.
22) When the timer rings, read the samples in the following order Al, Bl, Cl, Al
through A5, Blthrough B5, Cl through C5, Al, Bl and Cl.
23) Shut off the chart recorder and cap the pen.
24) Return the Cl cuvette to the Incubator and close the turret.
25) Push in the "HV" and "Turret" buttons on the front of the Analyzer (toggle them
off).
Demonstration of Statistical Control
Please refer to A. Ayyoubi, "Physical Treatment of Urban Stormwater Runoff Toxicants", pg.
11-23.
Calculations
At each of the three times that a sample is read, each of the three control samples is read three
times. The results of these nine analyses are averaged and have a standard deviation and coefficient
of variation calculated. If the coefficient of variation for the control samples at any time in the run is
greater than 0.05, the run is rejected.
Relative toxicity is calculated as follows:
% Reduction [at time /] = (Control - Sample)/Control x 100
where: Control = average peak height of the control samples at t
Sample = peak height of sample at /
E-82
-------
This completes a Microtox Analysis run. The spreadsheet that is used for data analysis is named
"TOXDEMO.XLS".
Assignment of Uncertainty
to be developed
References
Haw to Run a Standard Micmtox. Test. Microbics Corporation, Carlsbad, CA. 1988.
Micmtox. 100% ScreeningPmoedum (Handout). Microbics Corporation, Carlsbad, CA. 1990.
Ayyoubi, A. "Physical Treatment of Urban Stormwater Runoff Toxicants", Master's Thesis,
University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL, 1993.
E-83
-------
Attachment 5
Particle Size Analysis
Standard Operating Procedure
Scope
Parameters Measured
This method determines the number and size of particles suspended in a conductive liquid.
Range
This method is designed to provide accurate particle size distribution curves,within a 30:1
dynamic range by diameter, or a 27000:1 range by volume, from any one apeture. Size distributions
from 0.4 um to 1200 um depending on the orifice tube apeture size (upper limit dictated by particle
density and electrolyte viscosity, the lower limit by environmental conditions). Applicable apeture
sizes are: 20, 100, 140, and 200 (J,m. Apeture sizes larger than 200 um or smaller than 20 um require
special procedures not covered in this method. Each apeture allows the measurement of particles in
the nominal diameter range of 2 to 60% of die apeture diameter.
Matrix
The sample matrix is urban stormwater.
Expected Accuracy and Precision
Accuracy: ± 0.5%
Precision:< 1.0% RSD
Terminology
A general knowledge of fundamental statistical terminology is sufficient
Summary of Method
This method determines number and size of particles suspended in a conductive liquid by
monitoi Jig the electrical current between two electrodes immersed in die conductive liquid on either
side of a small apeture, through which a suspension of the particles is forced to flow. As each particle
passes through the apeture, it changes the impedance between the electrodes and produces an
electrical pulse of short duration having a magnitude essentially proportional to die particle volume.
The series of pulses is electronically scaled, counted, and accumulated in a number of size related
channels which, when dieir contents are displayed on an integral visual display, produces a size
distribution curve. Only those individuals who have reviewed instrument documentation and have
passed a laboratory practicum administered by Dr. Farmer on this instrument are authorized to
utilize this method.
Significance and Use
This method is intended to characterize particles and agglomerated state particles in urban
stormwater. Since a large fraction of toxic compounds and constituents of interest in surface water
are commonly found adsorbed to the surface of particles, it is important and significant to have a
characterization mediod that provides data on volume and diameter of particles that are not
spherical. Many particle sizing mediods are based on the assumption that counted particles are
spherical (most diffraction or forward scattering techniques). When these methods encounter non-
spherical particles, a bias is introduced'. This technique uses the Electrical Sensing Zone Method
which has been utilized and verified for many decades in die medical and health services industries,
ASTM Annual Book of Standards V 14.02, 1993,
E-84
-------
particularly in characterizing particles in parenteral fluids and cell counting and distribution. The
British Standards Institution has also published British Standard 3406:Part 5:1983; "Determination of
Particle Size Distribution: Recommendations for Electrical Sensing Zone Method (the Coulter
Principle)". Copies can be obtained from Sales Office, British Standards Institution, Linford Wood,
Milton Keynes, MK14 6LE, telephone: (0908) 221166.
Interferences
Particles in the diluent inside the aperture tube do not normally generate pulses in the analyzer,
since the flow is in one direction only. However, large dense particles may settle at the bottom of the
aperture tube. The jet effect of the aperture flow can stir up these settled particles so that some pass
through the sensing zone on the inner side of the aperture and cause interference. This effect can be
detected by making a blank count, on clean electrolyte, after each hour of use. Periodic flushing with
the auxiliary stopcock will eliminate the problem. Inner particle buildup may be indicated by an
excessive variation in repeat counts. In extreme cases, remove and clean the aperture tube.
Aperture blockage results in lower than expected counts, no count, or constant sounding of the
threshold alarm. If aperture blockage is suspected, inspect the aperture image on the aperture viewing
screen. Apertures can be cleaned by back-flushing, brushing, burning, or other methods. Refer to the
Coulter Counter Analyzer Reference Manual.
When more than one particle passes through the aperture at the same time, it is called
coincidence. Coincidence is detected by the Multisizer II by the unique properties of coincident
signals and reports the level of coincidence as a measurement is being made. Coincidence levels of 5-
10% are normal. The Multisizer II reports coincidence level, raw count and coincidence corrected
count as part of the size distribution report. If coincidence levels are too high, the sample must be
diluted. If there is no coincidence, then the sample is not concentrated enough and a larger aliquot of
sample must be diluted.
Apparatus
The Multisizer II comprises a sampling stand, with its associated Vacuum Control Unit and the
main electronics unit, which has a provision for connecting an optional X/Y plotter, Data Terminal
and Video Printer, allowing hard copy to be made of any display and associated data. Any data
terminal capable of receiving RS-232 signals will allow for ASCII text and numerical data to be
transferred from the Multisizer to the data terminal. This method utilizes Accucomp CD software from
Coulter Electronics, Inc. to capture data from the Multisizer II and to prepare, print, and store
reports and data analysis. An IBM compatible data terminal running Windows ® is required for this
software.
E-85
-------
Coulter Multisizer II with Sample Stand and Vacuum Unit
Other apparatus required include:
Orifice tubes in 20 to 200. um apertures.
Beakers ranging in size from 10 mL to 2 L are convenient, but only a 100 mL beaker is required
in addition to the sample stand beaker.
1, 2, and 5 mL pipettes are required, or some device capable of delivering these volumes with
high precision and accuracy.
Standard sieves are convenient, but not necessary unless interferences from large, dense particles
are anticipated.
Reagents and Materials
Coulter ISOTON® II solution (Available from Curtin Matheson Scientific) or a filtered isotonic
sodium chloride solution.
A range of polystyrene-divinylbenzene Latex® reference panicles are available from Coulter.
Table 1 indicates suitable calibration particles for particular orifice tubes.
E-86
-------
Standard Orifice Tube Data
Aperture Nominal Diameter (urn)
20
30
50
70
100
140
200
Nominal Particle Size Range
(urn)
0.5-12.0
0.6-18.0
1.0-30.0
1.4-42.0
2.0-60.0
2.8-84.0
4.0-120.0
Suitable Calibration Particles
(Urn)
2.0-3.0
3.0-6.0
3.0-10
5.0-15
10-20
15-40
20-40
Hazards and Precautions
Electrical
The instrument must be sited on a firm dry work bench, connected to 120 VAC power, and
must be grounded correctly.
Main voltages and d.c. voltages exceeding 50 V are used internally. The instrument must be
removed from mains before removing any cover. Refer all servicing to trained personnel.
Mechanical
Take care when handling glassware; it is fragile and if broken could cause injury.
Chemical
Mercury is used in an internal manometer to accurately regulate sample flow through the apeture.
Mercury is poisonous in liquid or vapor form, as are its compounds. It is extremely mobile. Contact
with human skin must be avoided. Remove spilt mercury with a proprietary mercury absorbent,
contained in the spill kit. Contact Dr. Farmer in the event of any mercury spill.
Before mixing electrolyte solutions consider any possible risk.
Fire
If the instrument starts to smoke or smell, indicating a fault causing overheating, immediately
switch the instrument off and disconnect from main power supply and contact Dr. Farmer.
Environment
The laboratory should be smoke free and have minimum dust.
The instrument should be operated within ambient temperature range 10 to 32 °C.
Protect the electrolyte solution from airborne dust. ISOTONII diluent supplied by Coulter
Electronics, Inc. (through Curtin Matheson Scientific) is essentially particle-free; other electrolyte
solutions must be filtered before use to exclude particles greater than 0.5% of diameter of the
aperture being used.
Sampling, Sample Preparation
A representative sample of the solution to be characterized should be obtained and placed in a
polyethylene or glass container and stored at 4°Cuntil measurement.
1, 2, or 5 mL aliquots of the sample are diluted to 100 mL with ISOTON® II solution prior to
analysis.
E-87
-------
It is important to consider that the Coulter Counter ® instrument will give a size analysis of the
paniculate material presented to the orifice. If the material is presented as an agglomeration or
flocculated form, then an untrue size analysis will result for individual particles. (In some instances
however, it is important to count the particles in an agglomerated state and dispersion to the ultimate
particle size is then undesirable.)
Preparation of Apparatus
Warm up time
For optimum accuracy, it is recommended that a period of 10 minutes is allowed between
switching on the Multisizer II and making first measurements.
Preparation
It is advised that several preliminary measurements are performed on the Multisizer II with a
sample representative of the system to be studied. For most accurate work, sample concentration
should be below that at which significant coincidence occurs, preferably at approximately the 5%
coincidence level. To prepare the Multisizer II for an analysis, the following procedures must be
earned out.
(1) select a suitable orifice tube so that most of the particles lie within its measurement range.
(2) choose an appropriate electrolyte solution. Establish that its "background count" is
acceptably low
Backgmund and Maximum Cumulative Counts for Multisizer II Orifice Tubes
Nominal Aperture
Diameter
20
30
50
70
100
140
200
Nominal Particle
Diameter Range
0.5-12.0
0.6-18.0
1.0-30.0
1.4-42.0
2.0-60.0
2.8-84.0
4.0-120.0
Cumulative
Background Count
Larger than 2% of
Aperture Diameter
800 @ 0.5 urn per
0.05 mL
500 @ 0.6 urn per
0.05 mL
250 @ 1.0 urn per
0.05 mL
1 200 @ 1.4 urn per
0.5 mL
400 @ 2.0 urn per
0.5 mL
600 @ 2.8 fim per
2.0 mL
200 @ 4.0 ^m per
2.0 mL
Counts per second
for 5% Aperture
Coincidence
7800
4500
3100
2120
1600
1175
800
Max. Cumulative
Count for 5%
Aperture
Coincidence
250,000 per 0.05
mL
68,000 per 0.05
mL
17,000 per 0.05
mL
58, 300 per 0. 5 mL
20,000 per 0.5 mL
7,285 per 0. 5 mL
10,000 per 2. 0 mL
Set Up Procedure - Automatic Mode
(1) Set the power switches of the Multisizer II and associated Sampling Stand to on, then switch
on any required accessories. The "Multisizer II Setup" menu is displayed.
(2) Enter the date, using the numeric keypad.
(3) Using the MENU cursor keys, step down the menu and enter the information as follows:
E-88
-------
Orifice size, diameter/length Enter via the key pad, the diameter of the orifice tube
fitted to the sampling stand. The corresponding apeture length and calibration constant" Kd"
applicable to the orifice tube is stored in memory.
(4) Press "CAL" key: The stored value of Kd, applicable to the tube size entered, is then
displayed.
(5) Press "SET UP" key, and repeat as necessary, to check that all entries and selections on
"Analysis Setup -1" and "Analysis Setup - 2" pages are as required. For detailed information on each
of these entries please refer to the Operator's Manual.
(6) Press "SET UP"key to display "Multisizer II SETUP" menu, return setting for " SET UP"
to "AUTOMATIC"
(7) Fill the Sample Stand beaker with enough blank electrolyte (ISOTON®!!) to cover apeture
and Pt electrode.
(8) Ensure that the RESET/COUNT switch on the Sampling Stand is set to RESET.
(9) Press FULL key on Multisizer II. The status message " Current and Gain Auto-Set in
Progress" is displayed at die bottom of the screen when this selection is made. The message remains
whilst the current and gain settings are recalculated.
Calibration and Standardization
Calibration is required only when a new tube is purchased, or an electrolyte odier than ISOTON
II is used. The only calibration constant is Kd, which is stored permanently in memory. In normal
operation calibration is not required. If a new tube is purchased or a different electrolyte is used, then
significant method development must be accomplished and this mediod is not appropriate. All
instrument parameters for this mediod are stored in the Multisizer II and should not be altered
widiout consultation with Drs. Parmer or Pitt.
Procedure
(1) With the required options selected on the " Full Range" menu and die preparation
procedure completed, press "RESET" if any existing data is accumulated in the Full Range mode is
to be deleted. Any data not deleted will be added to the results of the new measurement.
(2) Pipette 1.0 mL of sample into a 100 mL beaker and add 99.0 mL of ISOTON II.
(3) Place the sample to be analyzed on the beaker platform of die Sampling Stand. Adjust the
height of the platform, as necessary, to immerse the aperture in die sample.
(4) Set "RESET/COUNT" on the Sampling Stand to RESET.
(5) Press "START" key on Multisizer II. The Multisizer will "beep" when measurement is
completed and display die distribution of particle sizes on die Multisizer II screen.
(6) Insure diat the Accucomp for Windows software is running on die PC connected to die
Multisizer II.
(7) Input file name and sample descriptors of interest on die acquire menu of the Accucomp
software and press the acquire file button on the screen, the Accucomp software will then wait for a
file to be sent from the Multisizer II.
E-89
-------
(8) Press "PRINT" button on Multisizer II. The file will be transferred to the PC and the PC
will print out a hard copy of the report for the sample. A copy of the file is also stored on the PC's
hard drive.
Demonstration of Statistical Control
Since the calibration of these tubes does not change significantly with time, the only technique to
assure statistically sound measurements is the absence of raggedness in consecutive channels. A
smooth distribution is obtained with approximately 100,000 counts in 64 channels and 700,000 in
128-256 channels occur. This method utilizes a 30 second counting period. Previous experience with
urban runoff samples has indicated that when 1 mL is diluted to 100 mL, sufficient counts are
obtained to insure a smooth distribution. If a distribution exhibits raggedness (usually for the largest
particle sizes in the sample), generally there are not enough counts per channel to insure smoothness.
In this case additional sample is required and a 2 or 5 mL aliquot may be used instead of a 1 mL
aliquot.
Calculations
All calculations are performed by Accucomp software available from Coulter Electronics, Ltd.
For specific details of calculation please refer to the Accucomp software manual2.
A listing of all pertinent instrument parameters is printed with each report as well as:
A graph of the volume per mL vs. particle diameter (cumulative and individual channel count)
A graph of the surface area per mL vs particle diameter (cumulative and channel count)
Number statistics, including mean, median, mean/median ratio, mode, specific surface area, 95%
confidence limits, standard deviation, variance, coefficient of variation, skewness, and kurtosis
Volume statistics, including mean, median, mean/median ratio, mode, specific surface area, 95%
confidence limits, standard deviation, variance, coefficient of variation, skewness, and kurtosis
Surface area statistics including mean, median, mean/median ratio, mode, specific surface area,
95% confidence limits, standard deviation, variance, coefficient of variation, skewness, and kurtosis
Particle diameters are listed as differential number %, differential volume %, differential volume
per mL, differential number per mL, and differential surface area per mL. A typical report is 3 pages
of 8.5 x 11 inch paper per sample.
The data is also stored on magnetic media for archive and re-evaluation as needed.
Assignment of Uncertainty
The major causes of error in this method are due to a low particle count, high coincidence, or
occlusion of the orifice.
Low particle counts are easily remedied by increasing sample concentration.
High coincidence is remedied by decreasing sample concentration.
Occlusion of the orifice is easily detected by inspection of the aperture screen.
2 Coulter Multisizer AccuComp Color Software Reference Manual, Part # 4235890 (January 1989), Coulter
Electronics, Inc.
E-90
-------
References
ASTM Annual Book of Standards V 14.02, Calibration of Particle Size Measuring Devices, 1993
Coulter Multisizer AccuComp Color Software Reference Manual, Part # 4235890 (January
1989j, Coulter Electronics, Inc.
Coulter Multisizer II Operator's Manual
Coulter Multisizer II Fine Particle Applications Notes
Coulter Multisizer II Reference Manual
British Standard 3406:Part 5:1983; "Determination of Particle Size Distribution:
Recommendations for Electrical Sensing Zone Method (the Coulter Principle)".
E-91
-------
Attachment 6
COLOR
EPA Method 110.3 (Spectrophotometric)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes. It must be used for industrial wastes that cannot be determined by the Platinum Cobalt
method.
Summary ofMethod
2.1 Color characteristics are measured at pH 7.6 and at the original pH by obtaining the visible
absorption spectrum of the sample on a spectrophotometer. The percent transmission at certain
selected wavelengths is used to calculate the results.
2.2 The results are expressed in terms of dominant wavelength, hue, luminance, and purity.
Interferences
3.1 Since very slight amounts of turbidity interfere with the determination, samples must be
filtered before analysis.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Since biological activity may change the color characteristics of a sample, the determination
should be made as soon as possible. Refrigeration at 4°C is recommended.
Reference
5.1 The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 17th Edition, p. 66, Method
204B (1975).
E-92
-------
Attachment 7
CONDUCTANCE
EPA Method 120.1 (Specific Conductance, \imhos/cm at 25°C)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes and acid rain (atmospheric deposition).
Summary of Method
2.1 The specific conductance of a sample is measured by use of a self- contained conductivity
meter, Wheatstone bndge -type, or equivalent.
2.2 Samples are preferable analyzed at 25°C. If not, temperature corrections are made and results
reported at 25 °C.
Comments
3.1 Instrument must be standardized with KCl solution before daily use.
3.2 Conductivity cell must be kept clean.
3.3 Field measurements with comparable instruments are reliable.
3.4 Temperature variations and corrections represent the largest source of potential error.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Analyses can be performed either in the field or laboratory.
4.2 If analysis is not completed widiin 24 hours of sample collection, sample should be filtered
through a 0.45-micron filter and stored at 4°C. Filter and apparatus must be washed with high quality
distilled water and pre-rinsed with sample before use.
Apparatus
5.1 Conductivity bridge, range 1 to 1000 fimho per centimeter.
5.2 Conductivity cell, cell constant 1.0, or micro dipping type cell with 1.0 constant.
5.3 YSI#3403 or equivalent.
5.4 Thermometer
Reagents
6. 1 Standard potassium chloride solutions, 0.01 M: Dissolve 0.7406 gm of pre-dried (2 hour at
105°C) KCl in distilled water and dilute to 1 liter at 25 °C.
Cell Calibration
7.1 The analyst should use the standard potassium chloride solution (6.1) and the table below to
check the accuracy of the cell constant and conductivity bridge.
E-93
-------
Conductivity 0.01 M KC1
°C Micromhos/cm
21 1305
22 1332
23 1359
24 1386
25 1413
26 1441
27 1468
_28 1496
Procedure
8.1 Follow the direction of the manufacturer for the operation of the instrument.
8.2 Allow samples to come to room temperature (23 to27°C), if possible.
8.3 Determine the temperature of samples within 0.5 °C. If the temperature of the samples is not
25 °C, make temperature correction in accordance with the instruction in Section 9 to convert reading
to 25°.
Calculation
9.1 These temperature corrections are based on the standard KCl solution.
9.1.1 If the temperature of the sample is below 25 °C, add 2% of the reading per degree.
9.1.2 If the temperature is above 25 °C, subtract 2% of the reading per degree.
9.2 Report results as Specific Conductance, urnhos/cm at 25°.
Precision and Accuracy
10.1 Forty-one analysts in 17 laboratories analyzed six synthetic water samples containing
increments of inorganic salts, with the following results:
Increment as Specific
Conductance
100
106
808
848
1640
1710
Precision as Standard
Deviation
7.55
8.14
66.1
79.6
106
119
Accuracy as
Bias, %
-2.02
-0.76
-3.63
-4.54
-5.36
-5.08
Bias, |imhos/cm
-2.0
-0.8
-29.3
-38.5
-87.9
-86.9
(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses )
10.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL) using surface water samples with an average conductivity of
536 umhos/cm at 25°C, the standard deviation was ±6.
E-94
-------
Bibliography
1. The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:
Annual Book of ASTM Standards Part 31, "Water," Standard D1125 -64, p. 120 (1976).
2.Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p. 71, Method
205 (1975).
3. Instruction Manual for YSI Model 31 Conductivity Bridge.
4. Peden, M.E., and Skowron. "Ionic Stability of Precipitation Samples," Atmospheric
Environment, Vol. 12, p. 2343 -2344, 1978.
E-95
-------
Attachment 8
HARDNESS, Total (mg/1 as CaCO3)
EPA Method 130.2 (Titrimetric, EDTA)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The method is suitable for all concentration ranges of hardness; however, in order to avoid
large titration volumes, use a sample aliquot containing not more than 25 mg CaCC>3.
1.3 Automated titration may be used.
Summary of Method
2.1 Calcium and magnesium ions in the sample are sequestered upon die addition of disodium
ethylenediamine tetraacetate (NaiEDTA). The end point of the reaction is detected by means of
Eriochrome Black T indicator, which has a red color in the presence of calcium and magnesium and
a blue color when die cations are squestered.
Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Cool to 4°C, HNO3 to pH < 2 .
Comments
4.1 Excessive amounts of heavy metals can interfere. This is usually overcome by complexing the
metals with cyanide.
4.1.1 Routine addition of sodium cyanide solution (Caution: deadly poison) to prevent potential
metallic interference is recommended.
Apparatus
5.1 Standard laboratory titrimetric equipment.
Reagents
6.1 Buffer solution
6.1.1 If magnesium EDTA is available: Dissolve; 16.9 g NH,Cl in 143 ml cone. NH4OHin a 250
ml volumetric, add 1.25 g of magnesium salt of EDTA and dilute to the mark with distilled water.
Then go to 6. 1 .3.
6.1.2 If magnesium EDTA is unavailable: Dissolve 1.119 g disodium EDTA (analytical reagent
grade) and 780 mg MgSCu ZHiO (or 644 mg MgC^HzO) in 50 ml distilled water. Add this solution
to a 250 ml volumetric flask containing 16.9 g NI-UCl and 143 ml cone. NH^OHwith mixing and
dilute to die mark with distilled water.
6.1.3 Store in a tighdy stoppered plastic bottle; stable for approximately one month. Dispense
with bulb operated pipette. Discard when 1 or 2 ml added to sample fails to produce a pH of 10.0 ±
0.1 at endpoint of titration.
6.1.4 Commercially available "odorless buffers" which are more stable, may be used.
E-96
-------
6.2 Inhibitors: For most waters inhibitors are not necessary. If interfering ions are present use
one of the following:
6.2.1 Inhibitor I: NaCN powder. (Caution: extremely poisonous). Flush solutions or sample
containing this down drain using large quantities of water. Make sure no acids are present which
might liberate HCN gas.
6.2.2 Inhibitor II: Dissolve 5.0 g Na2S9 H2O or 3.7 g Na2S 5H2O in 100 ml distilled water.
Exclude air with tightly fitted rubber stopper. This gives sulfide precipitates which may obscure the
end point if large quantities of heavy metals are present. Deteriorates rapidly through air oxidation.
6.2.3 Inhibitor III: Dissolve 4.5 g hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 100 ml of 95% ethanol or
isopropanol.
6.3 Indicator Use a commercially available indicator such as Calmagite indicator (Mallinckrodt)
or one of the formulations described below (6. 3. 1 A. 3. 3)
6.3. 1 Mix 0.5 g Eriochrome Black T with 4.5 g hydroxylamine hydrochloride. Dissolve in 100
ml of 95% ethanol or isopropanol.
6.3.2 Dissolve 0.5 to 1.0 g Eriochrome Black T in an appropriate solvent such as triethanolamine
or 2-methoxyethanol. Stable approximately one week.
6.3.3 Mix together 0.5 g Eriochrome Black T and 100 g NaCl.
6.4 Standard EDTAtitrant, 0.02N: Place 3.723 g analytical reagent grade disodium
ethylenediamine tetraacetate dihydrate, Na2H2C10Hl208N2 2H20 in a 1 liter volumetric flask and
dilute to the mark with distilled water. Check widi standard calcium solution (6.4.1) by titration
(6.4.5). Store in polyethylene. Check periodically because of gradual deterioration.
6.4.1 Standard calcium solution 0.02 N: Place 1.000 g anhydrous calcium carbonate (primary
standard low in metals) in a 500 ml flask. Add, a little at a time, 1 + 1 HCL (6.4.2) until all of the
CaCCb has dissolved. Add 200 ml distilled water. Boil for a few minutes to expel CO2. Cool. Add a
few drops of methyl red indicator (6.4.3) and adjust to intermediate orange color by adding 3N
NH^OH (6.4.4) or 1 + 1 HC1 (6.4.2) as required. Quantitatively transfer to a 1 liter volumetric flask
and dilute to mark with distilled water.
6.4.2 Hydrochloric acid solution, 1+1.
6.4.3 Methyl red indicator. Dissolve 0.10 g methyl red in distilled water in a 100 ml volumetric
flask and dilute to the mark.
6.4.4 Ammonium hydroxide solution, 3 N: Dilute 210 ml of cone. M^GHto 1 liter with
distilled water.
6.4.5 Standardization titration procedure: Place 10.0 ml standard calcium solution (6.4.1) in vessel
containing about 50 ml distilled water. Add 1 ml buffer solution (6. 1). Add 1-2 drops indicator (6.3)
or small scoop of dry indicator (6.3.3). Titrate slowly with continuous stirring until the last reddish
tinge disappears; adding last few drops at 3 -5 second intervals. At end point the color is blue. Total
titration duration should be 5 minutes from the time of buffer addition.
N of EDTA= 0.2/ml of EDTA
E-97
-------
6.5 Ammonium Hydroxide, IN: Dilute 70 ml of cone. NH.tOHto 1 liter with distilled water.
Procedure
7.1 Pretreatment
7.1.1 For drinking waters, surface waters, saline waters, and dilution thereof, no pretreatment
steps are necessary. Proceed to 7.2.
7.1.2 For most wastewaters, and highly polluted waters, the sample must be digested as given in
the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual. Following this digestion, proceed to 7.2.
7.1.2 Titration of sample- normal to high hardness:
7.2.1 Sample should require' <15 ml EDTA titrant (6.4) and titration should be completed within
5 minutes of buffer addition.
7.2.2 Place 25.0 ml sample in titration vessels, neutralize with 1 N ammonium hydroxide (6. 5)
and dilute to about 50 ml.
7.2.3 Add 1 to 2 ml buffer solution (6.1).
7.2.4 If end point is not sharp (as determined by practice run) add inhibitor at this point (see 7.4).
7.2.5 Add 1 to 2 drops indicator solution (6.3. 1 or 6.3.2) or small scoop of dried powder
indicator formulation (6.3.3).
7.2.6 Titrate slowly with continuous stirring with standard EDTA titrant (6.4) until last reddish
tint disappears. Solution is normally blue at end point.
7.3 Titration of sample-low hardness (less than 5 mg/1)
7.3.1 Use a larger sample (100 ml)
7.3.2 Use proportionately larger amounts of buffer, inhibitor and indicator.
7.3.3 Use a micro-burette and run a blank using re-distilled, distilled or de-ionized water.
7.4 To correct for interferences:
7.4.1 Some metal ions interfere by causing fading or indistinct end points. Inhibitors reduce this
in accord with the scheme below for 25.0 ml samples diluted to 50 ml.
E-98
-------
Maximum Concentrations of Interferences Permissible with Various Inhibitorsa
Interfering Substance
Aluminum
Barium
Cadmium
Cobalt
Iron
Lead
Manganese
Nickel
Strontium
Zinc
Polyphosphate
Maximum Interference Concentration
Inhibitor I
20
b
b
over 20
over 30
b
b
over 20
b
b
Inhibitor II
20
b
20
0.3
5
20
1
0.3
b
200
10
mg/L
Inhibitor III
20
b
b
DC
20
b
1
0
b
b
abased on 25-ml sample diluted to 50 ml.
titrates as hardness.
'nhibitor fails if substance is present.
7.4.2 Inhibitor I: At step 1.2.4 add 250 mg NaCN. Add sufficient buffer to achieve pH 10.0 + 0.1
to offset alkalinity resulting from hydrolysis of sodium cyanide.
7.4.3 Inhibitor II: At step 7.2.4 add 1 ml of inhibitor II (6.2.2)
7.4.4 Inhibitor III: At step 1.2.4 add 1 m 1 of inhibitor III (6.2.3).
Calculations
Hardness (EDTA) as mg CaCO3/L = A x N x 50,000/ml sample
where:
A = ml EDTA u'trant (6.4)
E-99
-------
N = normality of EDTA titrant.
Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Forty-three analysts in nineteen laboratories analyzed six synthetic water samples containing
exact increments of calcium and magnesium salts, with the following results:
Increment as Total Hardness
mg/L, CaCO3
31
33
182
194
417
444
Precision as Standard
Deviation mg/L, CaCCh
2.87
2.52
4.87
2.98
9.65
9.73
Accuracy as
Bias7%
-0.87
-0.73
-0.19
-1.04
-3.35
-3.23
Bias,
mg/L, CaCO3
-0.003
-0.24
-0.4
-2.0
-13.0
-14.3
(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses)
9.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at an average concentration of
194 mg CaCCb/L, the standard deviation was ± 3.
9.3 A synthetic unknown sample containing 610 mg/L total hardness as CaCC>3 contributed by
108 mg/L Ca and 82 mg/L Mg, and the following supplementary substances: 3.1 mg/L K, 19.9
mg/L Na, 241 mg/L chloride, 0.25 mg/L nitrite N, 1.1 mg/L nitrate N, 259 mg/L sulfate, and 42.5
mg/L total alkalinity (contributed by NaHCCh) in distilled water was analyzed in 56 laboratories by
the EDTA titrimetric method with a relative standard deviation of 2.9% and a relative error of 0.8%.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 202,
Method 309B (1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D 1126-67, p 161, Method B
(1976).
E-100
-------
Attachment 9
pH
EPA Method 150.1 (Electrometric)
Scope and Application
1. 1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes and acid rain (atmospheric deposition).
Summary of Method
2.1 The pH of a sample is determined electrometrically using eidier a glass electrode in
combination with a reference potential or a combination electrode.
Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible preferably in the field at die time of
sampling.
3.2 High-purity waters and waters not at equilibrium with die atmosphere are subject to changes
when exposed to the atmosphere, therefore the sample containers should be filled completely and
kept sealed pnor to analysis.
Interferences
4.1 The glass electrode, in general, is not subject to solution interference from color, turbidity,
colloidal matter, oxidants, reductants or high salinity.
4.2 Sodium error at pH levels greater than 10 can be reduced or eliminated by using a "low
sodium error" electrode.
4.3 Coatings of oily material or particulate matter can impair electrode response. These coatings
can usually be removed by gentle wiping or detergent washing, followed by distilled water rinsing. An
additional treatment with hydrochloric acid (1 + 9) may be necessary to remove any remaining film.
4.4 Temperature effects on the electrometric measurement of pH arise from two sources.
The first is caused by the change in electrode output at various temperatures. This interference
can be controlled with instruments having temperature compensation or by calibrating the electrode-
instrument system at the temperature of the samples. The second source is the change of pH
inherent in die sample at various temperatures. This error is sample dependent and cannot be
controlled it should therefore be noted by reporting bodi the pH and temperature at the time of
analysis.
Apparatus
5.1 pH Meter -laboratory or field model. A wide variety of instruments are commercially
available with various specifications and optional equipment.
5.2 Glass electrode.
5.3 Reference electrode-a calomel, silver-silver chloride or odier reference electrode of constant
potential may be used.
E-101
-------
NOTE 1: Combination electrodes incorporating both measuring and reference functions are
convenient to use and are available with solid, gel type filling materials that require minimal
maintenance.
5.4 Magnetic stirrer and Teflon-coated stirring bar.
5.5 Thermometer or temperature sensor for automatic compensation.
Reagents
6.1 Primary standard buffer salts are available from the National Bureau of Standards and should
be used in situations where extreme accuracy is necessary.
6.1.1 Preparation of reference solutions from these salts require some special precautions and
handling3 such as low conductivity dilution water, drying ovens, and carbon dioxide free purge gas.
These solutions should be replaced at least once each month.
6.2 Secondary standard buffers may be prepared from NBS salts or purchased as a solution from
commercial vendors. Use of these commercially available solutions, that have been validated by
comparison to NBS standards, are recommended for routine use.
Calibration
7.1 Because of the wide variety of pH meters and accessories, detailed operating procedures
cannot be incorporated into this method. Each analyst must be acquainted with the operation of
each system and familiar with all instrument functions. Special attention to care of the electrodes is
recommended.
7.2 Each instrument/electrode system must be calibrated at a. minimum of two points that bracket the
expected pH of the samples and are approximately three pH units or more apart.
7.2.1 Various instrument designs may involve use of a "balance" or "standardize" dial and/or a slope
adjustment as outlined in the manufacturer's instructions. Repeat adjustments on successive portions of the
two buffer solutions as outlined in procedure 8.2 until readings are within 0.05 pH units of the buffer solution
value.
Procedure
8. 1 Standardize the meter and electrode system as outlined in Section 1.
8.2 Place the sample or buffer solution in a clean glass beaker using a sufficient volume to cover the
sensing elements of the electrodes and to give adequate clearance for the magnetic stirring bar.
8.2.1 If field measurements are being made the electrodes may be immersed directly in the sample stream
to an adequate depth and moved in a manner to insure sufficient sample movement across the electrode
sensing element as indicated by drift free (< 0.1 pH) readings.
8.3 If the sample temperature differs by more than 2°C from the buffer solution the measured pH values
must be corrected. Instruments are equipped with automatic or manual compensators that electronically adjust
for temperature differences. Refer to manufacturer's instructions.
8.4 After rinsing and gently wiping the electrodes, if necessary, immerse them into the sample beaker or
sample stream and stir at a constant rate to provide homogeneity and suspension of solids. Rate of stirring
should minimize the air transfer rate at the air water interface of the sample. Note and record sample pH and
3 National Bureau of Standards Special Publication 260.
E-102
-------
temperature. Repeat measurement on successive volumes of sample until values differ by less than 0. 1 pH
units. Two or three volume changes are usually sufficient.
8.5 For acid rain samples it is most important that the magnetic stirrer is not used. Instead, swirl
the sample gently for a few seconds after the introduction of the electrode(s). Allow the electrode(s)
to equilibrate. The air-water interface should not be disturbed while measurement is being made. If
the sample is not in equilibrium with the atmosphere, pH values will change as the dissolved gases
are either absorbed or desorbed. Record sample pH and temperature.
Calculation
9.1 pH meters read directly in pH units. Report pH to the nearest 0.1 unit and temperature to the
nearest °C.
Precision and Accuracy
10.1 Forty-four analysts in twenty laboratories analyzed six synthetic water samples containing
exact increments of hydrogen-hydroxyl ions, with the following results:
pH Units
3.5
3.5
7.1
7.2
8.0
8.0
Standard Deviation pH
Units
0.10
0.11
0.20
0.18
0.13
0.12
Accuracy as
Bias, %
-0.29
-0.00
+ 1.01
-0.03
-0.12
+0.16
Bias, pH Units
-0.01
+0.07
-0.002
-0.01
+0.01
(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses)
10.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at an average pH of 1.1, the
standard deviation was ±0.1.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 460, (1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1293-65, p 178 (1976).
3. Peden, M. E. and Skowron, L. M., Ionic Stability of Precipitation Samples, Atmospheric
Environment, Vol. 12, pp. 2343-2349,1978.
E-103
-------
Attachment 10
RESIDUE, FILTERABLE
EPA Method 160.1 (Gravimetric, Dried at 180°Q
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is 10 mg/L to 20,000 mg/L.
Summary of Method
2.1 A well-mixed sample is filtered through a standard glass fiber filter. The filtrate is evaporated
and dried to constant weight at 180°C.
2.2 If Residue, Non- Filterable is being determined, the filtrate from that method may be used
for Residue, Filterable.
Definitions
3.1 Filterable residue is defined as those solids capable of passing through a glass fiber filter and
dried to constant weight at 180°C.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is recommended.
Interferences
5.1 Highly mineralized waters containing significant concentrations of calcium, magnesium,
chloride and/or sulfate may be hygroscopic and will require prolonged drying, desiccation and rapid
weighing.
5.2 Samples containing high concentrations of bicarbonate will require careful and possibly
prolonged drying at 180°C to insure that all the bicarbonate is converted to carbonate.
5.3 Too much residue in the evaporating dish will crust over and entrap water that will not be
driven off during drying. Total residue should be limited to about 200 mg.
Apparatus
6.1 Glass fiber filter discs, 4.7 cm or 2.1 cm, without organic binder, Reeve Angel type 934-AH,
Gelman type A/E, or quivalent.
6.2 Filter holder, membrane filter funnel or Gooch crucible adapter.
6.3 Suction flask, 500ml.
6.4 Goochcrucibles, 25ml (if 2.1 cm filter is used).
6,5 Evaporating dishes, porcelain, 100 ml volume. (Vycor or platinum dishes may be
substituted).
6.6 Steam bath.
E-104
-------
6.7 Drying oven, 180°C ±2°C.
6.8 Desiccator.
6.9 Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
Procedure
7.1 Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the disc on the membrane filter apparatus or insert
into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible. While vacuum is applied, wash the disc with three
successive 20 mL volumes of distilled water. Remove all traces of water by continuing to apply
vacuum after water has passed through. Discard washings.
7.2 Preparation of evaporating dishes: If Volatile Residue is also to be measured heat the clean
dish to 550 ±50°C for one hour in a muffle furnace. If only Filterable Residue is to be measured heat
the clean dish to 180 ± 2°C for one hour. Cool in desicator and store until needed. Weigh
immediately before use.
7.3 Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Shake the sample vigorously and rapidly
transfer 100 mL to the funnel by means of a 100 mL graduated cylinder. If total filterable residue is
low, a larger volume may be filtered.
7.4 Filter the sample through the glass fiber filter, rinse widi three 10 mL portions of distilled
water and continue to apply vacuum for about 3 minutes after filtration is complete to remove as
much water as possible.
7.5 Transfer 100 mL (or a larger volume) of the filtrate to a weighed evaporating dish and
evaporate tb dryness on a steam bath.
7.6 Dry the evaporated sample for at least one hour at 180 ±2°C. Cool in a desiccator and weigh.
Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained or until weight loss is less than 0.5 mg.
Calculation
8. 1 Calculate filterable residue as follows:
Filterable residue, mg/L = (A - B)xl,000/C
where:
A = weight of dried residue + dish in mg
B = weight of dish in mg
C = volume of sample used in mL
Precision and Accuracy
9. 1 Precision and accuracy are not available at this time.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 92,
Method 208B, (1975).
E-105
-------
RESIDUE, NON- FILTERABLE
EPA Method 160,2 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105°C)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is 4 mg/L to 20,000 mg/L.
Summary of Method
2. 1 A well-mixed sample is filtered through a glass fiber filter, and the residue retained on the
filter is dried to constant weight at 103-105°C.
2.2 The filtrate from this method may be used for Residue; Filterable.
Definitions
3.1 Residue, non -filterable, is defined as those solids which are retained by a glass fiber filter and
dried to constant weight at 103-105°C.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Non-representative particulates such as leaves, sticks, fish, and lumps of fecal matter should
be excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired in the final result.
4.2 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is recommended.
Interferences
5.1 Filtration apparatus, filter material, pre-washing, post-washing, and drying temperature are
specified because these variables have been shown to affect the results.
5.2 Samples high in Filterable Residue (dissolved solids), such as saline waters, brines and some
wastes, may be subject to a positive interference. Care must be taken in selecting the filtering
apparatus so that washing of the filter and any dissolved solids in the filter (7.5) minimizes this
potential interference.
Apparatus
6.1 Glass fiber filter discs, without organic binder, such as Millipore AP-40, Reeves Angel 934-
AH, Gelman type A/E, or equivalent.
NOTE: Because of the physical nature of glass fiber filters, the absolute pore size cannot be
controlled or measured. Terms such as "pore size", collection efficiencies and effective retention are
used to define this property in glass fiber filters. Values for these parameters vary for the filters listed
above.
6.2 Filter support: filtering apparatus with reservoir and a coarse (40-60 microns) fritted disc as a
filter support.
NOTE: Many funnel designs are available in glass or porcelain. Some of the most common are
Hirsch or Buchner funnels, membrane filter holders and Gooch crucibles. All are available with
coarse frilled disc.
E-106
-------
6.3 Suction flask.
6.4 Drying oven, 103-105°C.
6.5 Desiccator.
6.6 Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
Procedure
7.1 Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the glass fiber filter on the membrane filter
apparatus or insert into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible with wrinkled surface up. While vacuum
is applied, wash the disc with three successive 20 mL volumes of distilled water. Remove all traces of
water by continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed through. Remove filter from membrane
filter apparatus or both crucible and filter if Gooch crucible is used, and dry in an oven at 103-105°C
for one hour. Remove to desiccator and store until needed. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant
weight is obtained (weight loss is less than 0. 5 mg). Weigh immediately before use. After weighing,
handle the filter or crucible/filter with forceps or tongs only.
7.2 Selection of Sample Volume
For a 4.7 cm diameter filter, filter 100 mL of sample. If weight of captured residue is less than
1.0 mg, the sample volume must be increased to provide at least 1.0 mg of residue. If other filter
diameters are used, start with a sample volume equal to 7 ml/cm2 of filter area and collect at least a
weight of residue proportional to the 1.0 mg stated above.
NOTE: If during filtration of this initial volume the filtration rate drops rapidly, or if filtration
time exceeds 5 to 10 minutes, the following scheme is recommended: Use an unweighed glass fiber
filter of choice affixed in the filter assembly. Add a known volume of sample to the filter funnel and
record the time elapsed after selected volumes have passed through the filter. Twenty-five mL
increments for timing are suggested. Continue to record the time and volume increments until
titration rate drops rapidly. Add additional sample if the filter funnel volume is inadequate to reach a
reduced rate. Plot the observed time versus volume filtered. Select the proper filtration volume as
that just short of the time a significant change in filtration rate occurred.
7.3 Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Wet the filter with a small volume of
distilled water to seat it against the frilled support.
7.4 Shake the sample vigorously and quantitatively transfer the predetermined sample volume
selected in 7.2 to the filter using a graduated cylinder. Remove all traces of water by continuing to
apply vacuum after sample has passed through.
7.5 With suction on, wash the graduated cylinder, filter, non-filterable residue and filter funnel
wall with three poraons of distilled water allowing complete drainage between washing. Remove all
traces of water by continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed through.
NOTE: Total volume of wash water used should equal approximately 2 ml per cm2. For a 4.1 cm
filter the total volume is 30 mL
7.6 Carefully remove the filter from the filter support. Alternatively, remove crucible and filter
from crucible adapter. Dry at least one hour at 103-105 °C. Cool in a desiccator and weigh. Repeat
the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained (weight loss is less than 0.5 mg).
E-107
-------
Calculations
8,1 Calculate non-filterable residue as follows:
Non- filterable residue. mg/L = (A-B)xlOOO/C
where:
A = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) + residue in mg
B = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) in mg
C = mL of sample filtered
Precision and Accuracy
9. 1 Precision data are not available at this time.
9.2 Accuracy data on actual samples cannot be obtained.
Bibliography
1. NCASI Technical Bulletin No. 291, March 1977. National Council of the Paper Industry for
Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., 260 Madison Ave., NY.
E-108
-------
RESIDUE, TOTAL
EPA Method 160.3 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105°C)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is from lOmg/L to 20,000 mg/L.
Summary of Method
2.1 A well mixed aliquot of the sample is quantitatively transferred to a pre-weighed evaporating
dish and evaporated to dryness at 103-105°C.
Definitions
3.1 Total Residue is defined as the sum of the homogenous suspended and dissolved materials in
a sample.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is recommended.
Interferences
5.1 Non-representative particulate such as leaves, sticks, fish and lumps of fecal matter should be
excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired in the final result.
5.2 Floating oil and grease, if present, should be included in the sample and dispersed by a
blender device before aliquoting.
Apparatus
6.1 Evaporating dishes, porcelain, 90mm, 100 mL capacity. (Vycor or platinum dishes may be
substituted and smaller size dishes may be used if required .)
Procedure
7.1 Heat the clean evaporating dish to 103-105°C for one hour, if Volatile Residue is to be
measured, heat at 550 ± 50°C for one hour in a muffle furnace. Cool, desiccate, weigh and store in
desiccator until ready for use.
7.2 Transfer a measured aliquot of sample to the pre-weighed dish and evaporate to dryness on a
steam bath or in a drying oven.
7.2.1 Choose an aliquot of sample sufficient to contain a residue of at least 25 mg. To obtain a
weighable residue, successive aliquots of sample may be added to the same dish.
7.2.2 If evaporation is performed in a drying oven, the temperature should be lowered to
approximately 98 °C to prevent boiling and splattering of the sample.
7.3 Dry the evaporated sample for at least 1 hour at 103-105°C. Cool in a desiccator and weigh.
Repeat the cycle of drying at 103-105°Q cooling, desiccating and weighing until a constant weight is
obtained or until loss of weight is less than 4% of the previous weight, or 0.5 mg, whichever is less.
E-109
-------
Calculation
8.1 Calculate total residue as follows:
Total residue, mg/L = (A - B) x 1,000/C
where:
A = weight of sample + dish in mg
B = weight of dish in mg
C = volume of sample in mL
Precision and Accuracy
9. 1 Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods forthe Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 91, Method
208A, (1975).
E-110
-------
RESIDUE, VOLATILE
EPA Method 160.4 (Gravimetric, Ignition at 550°C)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method determines the weight of solid material combustible at 550°C.
1.2 The test is useful in obtaining a rough approximation of the amount oforgamc matter present
in the solid fraction of sewage, activated sludge, industrial wastes, or bottom sediments.
Summary of Method
2.1 The residue obtained from the determination of total, filterable or non-filterable residue is
ignited at 550°C in a muffle furnace. The loss of weight on ignition is reported as mg/ L volatile
residue.
Comments
3.1 The test is subject to many errors due to loss of water of crystallization, loss of volatile
organic matter pnor to combustion, incomplete oxidation of certain complex orgamcs, and
decomposition of mineral salts during combustion.
3.2 The results should not be considered an accurate measure of organic carbon in the sample,
but may be useful for other purposes.
3.3 The principal source of error in the determination is failure to obtain a representative sample.
Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decompostion of solids is recommended.
Precision and Accuracy
5.1 A collaborative study involving three laboratories examining four samples by means of ten
replicates showed a standard deviation of ±11 mg/L at 170 mg/L volatile residue concentration.
Reference
6. 1 The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 95, Method
208E, (1975).
E-lll
-------
Attachment 11
TURBIDITY
EPA Method 180.1 (Nephelometic)
Scope and Application
1.1 Thismethod is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters in the range of turbidity from
0 to 40 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU). Higher values may be obtained with dilution of the
sample.
NOTE 1: NTUs are considered comparable to the previously reported Formazin Turbidity
Units (FTU) and Jackson Turbidity Units (JTU).
Summary of Method
2.1 The method is based upon a comparison of the intensity of light scattered by the sample
under defined conditions with the intensity of light scattered by a standard reference suspension. The
higher the intensity of scattered light, the higher the turbidity. Readings, in NTU's, are made in a
nephelometer designed according to specifications outlined in Apparatus. A standard suspension of
Formazin, prepared under closely defmed conditions, is used to calibrate the instrument.
2.1.1 Formazin polymer is used as die turbidity reference suspension for water because it is more
reproducible than other types of standards previously used for turbidity standards.
2.1.2 A commercially available polymer standard is also approved for use for die National
Interim Primary Drinking Water Regulations. This standard is identified as AMCO-AEPA-1 available
from Amco Standard International, Inc.
Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is recommended.
Interferences
4.1 The presence of floating debns and coarse sediments which settle out rapidly will give low
readings. Finely divided air bubbles will affect the results in a positive manner.
4.2 The presence of true color, that is the color of water which is due to dissolved substances
which absorb light, will cause turbidities to be low, although this effect is generally not significant
with finished waters.
Apparatus
5.1 The turbidimeter shall consist ofa nephelometer with light source for illuminating the sample
and one or more photoelectric detectors with a readout device to indicate the intensity of light
scattered at right angles to the path of the incident light. The turbidimeter should be so designed that
little stray light reaches the detector in the absence of turbidity and should be free from significant
drift after a short warm-up period.
5.2 The sensitivity of the instrument should permit detection of a turbidity difference of 0.02
unit or less in waters having turbidities less than 1 unit. The instrument should measure from 0 to 40
E-112
-------
units turbidity. Several ranges will be necessary to obtain both adequate coverage and sufficient
sensitivity for low turbidities.
5.3 The sample tubes to be used with the available instrument must be of clear, colorless g!ass.
They should be kept scrupulously clean, both inside and out, and discarded when they become
scratched or etched. They must not be handled at all where the light strikes them, but should be
provided with sufficient extra length, or with a protective case, so that they may be handled.
5.4 Differences in physical design of turbidimeters will cause differences in measured values for
turbidity even though the same suspension is used for calibration. To minimize such differences, the
following design criteria should be observed:
5.4.1 Light source: Tungsten lamp operated at a color temperature between 2200-3000°K.
5.4.2 Distance traversed by incident light and scattered light within the sample tube: Total not to
exceed 10 cm.
5.4.3 Detector Centered at 90° to the incident light path and not to exceed ±3.0° from 90°. The
detector, and filter system if used, shall have a spectral peak response between 400 and 600 nm.
5.5 The Hach Turbidimeter, Model 2100 and 2100 A, is in wide use and has been found to be
reliable; however, other instruments meeting the above design criteria are acceptable.
Reagents
6.1 Turbidity-free water: Pass distilled water through a 0.45 (i pore size membrane filter if such
filtered water shows a lower turbidity than the distilled water.
6.2 Stock formazin turbidity suspension:
Solution 1: Dissolve 1.00 g hydrazine sulfate, (NH2)2 • HiSCU , in distilled water and dilute to 100
mL in a volumetric flask.
Solution 2: Dissolve 10.00 g hexamethylenetetrarmne in distilled water and dilute to 100 mL in a
volumetric flask.
In a 100 mL volumetric flask, mix 5.0 ml Solution 1 with 5.0 ml Solution 2. Allow to stand 24 hours
at 25 ±3°C, then dilute to the mark and mix.
6.3 Standard formaziii turbidity suspension: Dilute 10.00 ml stock turbidity suspension to 100
mL with turbidity-free water. The turbidity of this suspension is defined as 40 units Dilute portions
of the standard turbidity suspension with turbidity -free water as required.
6.3.1 A new stock turbidity suspension should be prepared each month. The standard turbidity
suspension and dilute turbidity standards should be prepared weekly by dilution of the stock turbidity
suspension.
6.4 The AMCO-AEPA-1 standard as supplied requires no preparation or dilution prior to use.
Procedure
7.1 Turbidimeter calibration: The manufacturer's operating instructions should be followed.
Measure standards on the rurbidimeter covering the range of interest. If the instrument is already
calibrated in standard turbidity units, this procedure will check the accuracy of the calibration scales.
E-113
-------
At least one standard should be run in each instrument range to be used. Some instruments permit
adjustments of sensitivity so that scale values will correspond to turbidities. Reliance on a
manufacturer's solid scattering standard for setting overall instrument sensitivity for all ranges is not
an acceptable practice unless the turbidimeter has been shown to be free of drift on all ranges. If a
pre-calibrated scale is not supplied, then calibration curves should be prepared for each range of the
instrument.
7.2 Turbidities less than 40 units: Shake the sample to thoroughly disperse the solids. Wait until
air bubbles disappear then pour the sample into the turbidimeter tube. Read the turbidity directly
from the instrument scale or from the appropriate calibration curve.
7.3 Turbidities exceeding 40 units: Dilute the sample with one or more volumes of turbidity-free
water until the turbidity falls below 40 units. The turbidity of the original sample is then computed
from the turbidity of the diluted sample and the dilution factor. For example, if 5 volumes of
turbidity-free water were added to 1 volume of sample, and the diluted sample showed a turbidity of
30 units, then the turbidity of the original sample was 180 units.
7.3.1 The Hach Turbidimeters, Models 2100 and 2100A, are equipped with 5 separate scales:0-
0.2, 0-1.0, 0-100, and 0-1000 NTU. The upper scales are to be used only as indicators of required
dilution volumes to reduce readings to less than 40 NTU.
NOTE 2: Comparative work performed in the MDQAR Laboratory indicates a progressive
error on sample turbidities in excess of 40 units.
Calculation
8.1 Multiply sample readings by appropriate dilution to obtain final reading.
8.2 Report results as follows:
NTU Record to Nearest:
"6To-'i7o"~ " 1x05
1-10 0.1
10-40 1
40-100 5
100-400 10
400-1000 50
>1000 100
Precision and Accuracy
9.1 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at levels of 26, 41, 75 and 180
NTU, the standard deviations were ±0.60, ±0.94, ±1.2 and ±4.7 units, respectively.
E-114
-------
9.2 Accuracy data are not available at this time.
Bibliography
1. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1889 -71, p 223 (.1976).
2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Fdition, p 132,
Method 214A, (1975).
E-115
-------
Attachment 12
DETERMINATION OF TRACE ELEMENTS BY STABILIZED
TEMPERATURE GRAPHITE FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORPTION
SPECTROMETRY
UAB METHOD 200.9
SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This method provides procedures for the determination of dissolved and total recoverable
elements in ground water, surface water, drinking water and wastewater. This method is also
applicable to total recoverable elements in sediment, sludge, biological tissues, and solid waste
samples.
1.2 Dissolved elements are determined after suitable filtration and acid preservation. Acid
digestion procedures are required prior to the determination of total recoverable elements.
Appropriate digestion procedures for biological tissues should be utilized pnor to sample analysis.
1.3 This method is applicable to the determination of the following elements by stabilized
temperature graphite furnace atomic absorption spectrometry (STGFAA).
Metals determined by S TGFA A
Element Chemical Abstract Services Registry Numbers (CASRN)
744(M3~-9 " ~
Chromium (Cr) 7440-47-3
Copper (Cu) 7440-50-8
Lead (Pb) 7439-92-1
Nickel (Ni) 7440-02-0
Zinc (Zn) 7440-66-6
NOTE: Method detection limit and instrumental operating conditions for the applicable
elements are listed in Table 2. These are intended as a guide to instrumental detection limits typical of
a system optimized for the element employing commercial instrumentation. However, actual method
detection limits and linear working ranges will be dependent on the sample matrix, instrumentation
and selected operating conditions.
1.4 The sensitivity and limited linear dynamic range (LDR) of GFAA often implies the need to
dilute a sample pnor to the analysis. The actual magnitude of the dilution as well as the cleanliness of
the labware used to perform the dilution can dramatically influence the quality of the analytical
results. Therefore, samples types requiring large dilution should be analyzed by an alternative
analytical method which has a larger LDR or which is inherently less sensitive than GFAA.
1.5 This method should be used by analysts experienced in the use of GFAA.
E-116
-------
SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 This method describes the determination of applicable elements by stabilized temperature
platform graphite furnace atomic absorption (STPGFAA). In STPGFAA the sample (and the matrix
modifier, if required) is first pipetted onto the platform or a device which provides delayed
atomization. The sample is then dried at a relatively low temperature («120°C) to avoid spattering.
Once dried, the sample is normally pretreated in a char or ashing step which is designed to minimize
the interference effects caused by the concomitant sample matrix. After the char step the furnace is
allowed to cool prior to atomization. The atomization cycle is characterized by rapid heating of the
furnace to a temperature where the metal (analyte) is atomized from the pyrolytic graphite surface.
The resulting atomic cloud absorbs the element specific atomic emission produced by a hollow
cathode lamp (HCL) or a electrodeless discharge lamp (EDL). Because the resulting absorbance
usually has a nonspecific component associated with the actual analyte absorbance, an instrumental
background correction device is necessary to subtract from the total signal the component which is
nonspecific to the analyte. In the absence of interferences, the background corrected absorbance is
directly related to the concentration of the analyte. Interferences relating to STPGFAA (Sect. 4) must
be recognized and corrected. Instrumental drift as well as suppressions or enhancements of
instrument response caused by the sample matrix must be corrected for by the method of standard
addition (Sect. 11.5).
DEFINITIONS
3.1 DISSOLVED - Material that will pass through a 0.45-um membrane filter assembly, prior to
sample acidification.
3.2 TOTAL RECOVERABLE - The concentration of analyte determined on an unfiltered
sample following treatment with hot dilute mineral acid. !
3.3 INSTRUMENT DETECTION LIMIT (IDL) - The concentration equivalent of an analyte
signal equal to three times the standard deviation of the calibration blank signal at the selected
absorbance line.
3.4 METHOD DETECTION LIMIT (MDL) - The minimum concentration of an analyte that
can be identified, measured and reported with 99% confidence that the analyte concentration is
greater than zero.
3.5 LINEAR DYNAMIC RANGE (LDR) - The concentration range over which the analytical
working curve remains linear.
3.6 LABORATORY REAGENT BLANK (LRB) - An aliquot of reagent water that is treated
exactly as a sample including exposure to all glassware, equipment, and reagents chat are used with
samples. The LRB is used to determine if method analytes or other interferences are present in the
laboratory environment, reagents or apparatus.
3.7 CALIBRATION BLANK - A volume of ASTM type I water acidified such that the acid(s)
concentration is identical to the acid(s) concentration associated with the calibration standards.
3.8 STOCK STANDARD SOLUTION - A concentrated solution containing one analyte
prepared in the laboratory using an assayed reference compound or purchased from a reputable
commercial source.
3.9 CALIBRATION STANDARD (CAL) - A solution prepared from the stock standard
solution which is used to calibrate the instrument response with respect to analyte concentration.
E-117
-------
3.10 LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK (LFB) - An aliquot of reagent water to which a
known quantity of each method analyte is added in the laboratory. The LFB is analyzed exactly like a
sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the method is within accepted control limits.
3.11 LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE MATRIX (LFM) - An aliquot of an
environmental sample to which a known quantity of each method analyte is added in the laboratory.
The LFM is analyzed exactly like a sample, and its purpose is to determine whether the sample matrix
contributes bias to the analytical results.
3.12 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE (QCS) - A solution containing a known concentration of
each method analyte derived from externally prepared test materials. The QCS is obtained from a
source external to the laboratory and is used to check laboratory performance.
3.13 MATRIX MODIFIER - A substance added to the graphite furnace along with the sample
in order to minimize the interference effects by selective volatilization of either analyte or matrix
components.
INTERFERENCES
4.1 Several interference sources may cause inaccuracies in the determination of trace elements by
GFAA. These interferences can be classified into three major subdivisions, namely spectral,
nonspectral and memory.
4.1.1 Spectral Interferences resulting from the absorbance of light by a molecule and/or an atom
which is not the analyte of interest. Spectral interferences caused by an element only occur if there is
a spectral overlap between the wavelength of the interfering element and the analyte of interest.
Fortunately, this type of interference is relatively uncommon in STPGFAA because of the narrow
atomic line widths associated with STPGFAA. In addition, die use of appropriate furnace
temperature programs and high spectral purity lamps as light sources can minimize the possibility of
this type of interference. However, molecular absorbances can span over several hundred
nanometers producing broadband spectral interferences. This type of interference is far more
common in STPGFAA. The use of matrix modifiers, selective volatilization and background
correctors are all attempts to eliminate unwanted non- specific absorbance. The non-specific
component of the total absorbance can vary considerably from sample type to sample type.
Therefore, the effectiveness of a particular background correction device may vary depending on the
actual analyte wavelength used as well as the nature and magnitude of the interference.
Spectral interferences are also caused by the emission from black body radiation produced during
the atomization furnace cycle. This black body emission reaches the photomultiplier tube producing
erroneous results. The rr. ignitude of this interference can be minimized by proper furnace tube
alignment and monochromator design. In addition, atomization temperatures which adequately
volatilize die analyte of interest without producing unnecessary black body radiation can help reduce
unwanted background emission produced during atomization.
Note: A spectral interference may be manifested by extremely high backgrounds (1.0 abs*)
which may exceed the capability of the background corrector and/or it may be manifested as a non-
analyte element which may cause a direct spectral overlap with die analyte of interest. If a spectral
interference is suspected, die analyst is advised to:
* This background level is given as a guide and is not intended to serve as an absolute value which may be
applied in all situations
E-118
-------
1. Dilute the sample if the analyte absorbance is large enough tb sacrifice some of the sensitivity.
This dilution may dramatically reduce a molecular background or reduce it to the point where the
background correction device is capable of adequately removing the remaining nonspecific
component. If the non-specific component is produced by a spectral overlap with an interfering
element, the change in absorbance caused by dilution of the sample should decrease in a linear
fashion, provided the undiluted and diluted sample are both within the linear range of the interfering
element.
2. If dilution is not acceptable because of the relatively low analyte absorbance readings or the
dilution produces a linear decrease in the nonspecific absorbance, the analyst is advised to investigate
another analyte wavelength which may eliminate the suspected spectral interference(s).
3. If dilution and alternative spectral lines are not acceptable, the analyst is advised to attempt to
selectively volatilize the analyte or the nonspecific component thereby eliminating the unwanted
interference (s) by atomizing the analyte in an interference-free environment.
4. If none of the above advice is applicable and the spectral interference persists, an alternative
analytical method which is not based on the same type of physical /chemical principle may be
necessary to evaluate the actual analyte concentration.
4.1.2 Non-spectral -Interferences caused by sample components which inhibit the formation of
free atomic analyte atoms during the atomization cycle. The use of a delayed atomization device
which provides stabilized temperatures is required, because these devices provide an environment
which is more conducive to the formation of free analyte atoms and thereby minimize this type of
interference. This type of interference can be detected by analyzing a sample plus a laboratory
fortified sample matrix early within any analysis set. From this data, immediately calculate the percent
recovery (Sect. 1 0. 4. 2). If the percent recovery is out side the laboratory determined control limits
(Sect. 10.3.3) a potential problem should be suspected. If the result indicates a potential matrix effect,
the analyst is advised to:
1. Perform the method of standard additions (see Sect. 11.5); if the "percent recovery" from the
method of standard addition is drastically different from the percent recovery from LFM, then lab
contamination or another lab related problem should be suspected and corrected.
NOTE: If contamination is suspected, analyze the LFB and calculate a percent recovery.
2. If the two recovenes are approximately equal and the response from the standard addition is
dramatically different than that which would be calculated from the calibration curve, the sample
should be suspected of a matrix induced interference and analyzed by the method of standard
addition (Sect. 11.5).
The limitations listed in Sect. 11.5 must be met in order to apply these recommendations.
4.1.3 Memory interferences resulting from analyzing a sample containing a high concentration of
an element (typically a high atomization temperature element) which cannot be removed
quantitatively in one complete set of furnace steps. The analyte which remains in the furnace can
produce false positive signals on subsequent sample(s). Therefore, the analyst should establish the
analyte concentration which can be injected into the furnace and adequately removed in one
complete set of furnace cycles. This concentration represents the maximum concentration of analyte
within a sample which will not cause a memory interference on the subsequent sample(s). If this
concentration is exceeded, the sample should be diluted and a blank should be analyzed (to assure
the memory affect has been eliminated) before reanalyzing the diluted sample.
E-119
-------
Note: Multiple clean out furnace cycles may be necessary in order to fully utilize the LDR for
certain elements.
4.1.4 Specific Element Interferences
Cadmium: The HCl present from the digestion procedure can influence the sensitivity for Cd. A
1% HCl solution with Pd used as a modifier results in a 70% loss in sensitivity relative to the analyte
in a 1% HNCb solution. The use of Pd/Mg/H as a modifier reduces this suppression to less than
10%.
Copper Pd lines at 324.27 nm and 325.16 nm may produce an interference on the Cu line at
324.8 nm5.
Lead: The HCl present from the digestion procedure can influence the sensitivity for Pb. A 1%
HCl solution with Pd used as a modifier results in a 70% loss in sensitivity relative to the analyte
response in a 1% HNOj solution. The use of Pd/MS/H2 as a modifier reduces this suppression to
less than 10%.
SAFETY
5.1 The toxiaty or carcinogenicity of reagents used in this method has not been fully established.
Each chemical should be regarded as a potential health hazard, and exposure to these compounds
should be as low as reasonably achievable. Each laboratory is responsible for maintaining a current
awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this
method1'2. A reference file of material data handling sheets is available to all personnel involved in
the chemical analysis.
5.2 The graphite tube during atomization emits intense UV radiation. Suitable precautions should
be taken to protect personnel from this hazard.
5.3 The use of argon/hydrogen gas mixture during the dry and char steps may evolve a
considerable amount of HCl gas. Therefore, adequate ventilation is required.
APPARATUS AND EQUIPMENT
6.1 GRAPHITE FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORBANCE SPECTROPHOTOMETER
6.1.1 The GFAA spectrometer must be capable of programmed heating of the graphite tube and
the associated delayed atomization device. The instrument should be equipped with an adequate
background correction device capable of removing undesirable non-specific absorbance over the
spectral region of interest. The capability to record relatively fast (< 1 see) transient signals and
evaluate data on a peak area basis is preferred. In addition, a recirculating refrigeration bath is
recommended for improved reproducibility of furnace temperatures. The data shown in the tables
were obtained using the stabilized temperature platform and Zeeman background correction. This
method utilizes Smith-Heiftje background correction.
6.1.2 Single element hollow cathode lamps or single element electrodeless discharge lamps
along with the associated power supplies.
6.1.3 Argon gas supply (high-purity grade, 99.99%).
6.1.4 A 5% hydrogen in argon gas mix and the necessary hardware to use this gas mixture during
specific furnace cycles.
E-120
-------
6.1.5 Autosampler - Although not specifically required, the use of an autosampler is highly
recommended.
6.1.6 Microwave digestion apparatus.
6.1.7 Microwave vessels.
6.2 GRAPHITE FURNACE OPERATING CONDITIONS- A guide to experimental
conditions for the applicable elements are shown in Table 2
6.3 SAMPLE PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
6. 3. 1 Balance - Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to 0.1 mg.
6.3.2 Hot Plate - Corning PC1OO or equivalent.
6.3.3 Centrifuge - Steel cabinet with guard bowl, electric timer and brake.
6.3.4 Drying Oven capable of ±3°C temperature control.
6.4 LABWARE - The determination of trace level elements requires a consideration of potential
sources of contamination and analyte losses. Potential contamination sources include improperly
cleaned laboratory apparatus and general contamination within the laboratory environment from
dust, etc. A clean laboratory work area designated for trace element sample handling must be
used. Sample containers can introduce positive and negative errors in the determination of trace
elements by contributing contaminants through surface desorption or leaching and/or depleting
element concentrations through adsorption processes. All reusable labware (glass, quartz,
polyethylene, Teflon, etc. .), including the sample container, should be cleaned prior to use. Labware
should be soaked overnight and thoroughly washed with laboratory -grade detergent and water,
rinsed with water, and soaked for four hours in a mixture of dilute nitric and hydrochloric acid
(1+2+9), followed by rinsing with ASTM type I water and oven drying.
NOTE: Chromic acid must not be used for cleaning glassware.
6.4.1 Glassware - Volumetric flasks and graduated cylinders.
6.4.2 Assorted calibrated pipettes.
6.4.3 Conical Phillips beakers, 250-mL with 50-mm watch glasses. Griffin beakers, 250-mL with
15-mm watch glasses.
6.4.4 Storage bottles - Narrow mouth bottles, Teflon FEP (fluorinated ethylene propylene) with
Tefzel ETFE (ethylene tetrafluorethylene) screw closure, 125-mL and 250-mL capacities.
6.4.5 Wash bottle - One piece stem, Teflon FEP bottle with Tefzel ETFE screw closure, 125-mL
capacity.
REAGENTS AND CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
7.1 REAGENTS - Reagents may contain elemental impurities which might affect analytical data.
Because of the high sensitivity of GFAA, high- purity reagents should be used whenever possible. All
acids used for this method must be ultra high- purity grade. Suitable acids are available from a
number of manufacturers or may be prepared by sub-boiling distillation.
E-121
-------
7.1.1 Nitric acid, concentrated (sp. gr. 1.41) (CASRN 1691-37-2).
7.1.2 Nitric acid (1+1) - Add 500 mL cone, nitric acid to 400 ml of ASTM type I water and
dilute to 1 L.
7.1.3 Nitric acid (1+9) - Add 100 mL cone, to 400 mL of ASTM type I water and dilute to 1 L.
7.1.4 Hydrochloric acid, concentrated (sp.gr. 1.19) (CASRN 1641-01-0).
7.1.5 Hydrochloric acid (1+4) - Add 200 mL cone, hydrochloric acid to 400 mL ASTM type I
water and dilute to 1000 mL.
7.1.6 Tartaric acid. ACS reagent grade (CASRN 87-69-4).
7.1.7 Matrix Modifier, dissolve 300 mg Palladium (Pd) powder in concentrated HNOs (1 mL of
HNO adding 10 mL of concentrated HC1 if necessary). Dissolve 200 mg of Mg(N03)z in ASTM type
1 water. Pour the two solutions together and dilute to 100 mL with ASTM type 1 water.
Note: It is recommended that the matrix modifier be analyzed separately in order to assess the
contribution of the modifier to the overall laboratory blank.
7.1.8 Ammonium hydroxide, concentrated (sp.gr. 0.902) (CASRN 1336-21-6).
7.2 WATER - For all sample preparation and dilutions, ASTM type I water (ASTM D1193) is
required. Suitable water may be prepared by passing distilled water through a mixed bed of anion and
cation exchange resins.
7.3 STANDARD STOCK SOLUTION - May be purchased from a reputable commercial
source or prepared from ultra high- purity grade chemicals or metal (99.99- 99.999% pure). All salts
should be dried for 1 h at 105°C, unless otherwise specified. (CAUTION: Many metal salts are
extremely toxic if inhaled or swallowed. Wash hands thoroughly after handling). The stock solution
should be stored in Teflon bottles. The following procedures may be used for preparing standard
stock solutions:
NOTE: Some metals, particularly those which form surface oxides, require cleaning prior to
being weighed. This may be achieved by pickling the surface of the metal in acid. An amount in
excess of the desired weight should be pickled repeatedly, rinsed with water, dried and weighed until
the desired weight is achieved.
7.3.1 Cadmium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 ug Cd Pickle Cd metal in (1+9) nitric acid to an
exact weight of 0.100 g. Dissolve in 5 mL (1+1) nitric acid, heating to effect solution. Cool and dilute
to 100 mL with ASTM type I water.
7.3.2 Chromium solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 ug Cr: Dissolve 0.1923gCrO3 in a solution
mixture of 10 mL ASTM type I water and 1 mL cone, nitric acid. Dilute to 100 mL with ASTM type
I water.
7.3.3 Copper solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 ug Cu: Pickle Cu metal in (1+9) nitric acid to an exact
weight of O.lOOg. Dissolve in 5 mL (1+1) nitric acid, heating to effect solution. Cool and dilute to
100 mL with ASTM type I water.
E-122
-------
7.3.4 Lead solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 ug Pb: Dissolve 0.1599g PbNC>3 in 5 mL (1+1) nitric
acid. Dilute to 100 mL with ASTM type I water.
7.3.5 Nickel solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 ug Ni: Dissolve 0.1 OOg nickel powder in 5 mL cone.
nitric acid, heating to effect solution. Cool and dilute to 100 mL with ASTM type I water.
7. 3.6 Zinc solution, stock, 1 mL = 1000 f^g Zn : Pickle zinc metal in (1-1-9) nitric acid to an exact
weight of O.lOOg. Dissolve in 5 mL (1+1) nitric acid, heating to effect solution. Cool and dilute to
100 mL with ASTM type I water.
7.4 PREPARATION OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS - Fresh calibration standards (CAL
Solution) should be prepared every two weeks or as needed. Dilute each of the stock standard
solutions to levels appropriate to the operating range of the instrument using the appropriate acid
diluent (see note). The element concentrations in each CAL solution should be sufficiently high to
produce good measurement precision and to accurately define the slope of the response curve. The
instrument calibration should be initially verified using a quality control sample (Sect. 7.6).
NOTE: The appropriate acid diluent for dissolved elements in water samples is 1% HNO3. For
total recoverable elements in waters the appropriate acid diluent is 2% FINO3 and 1% HCl. Finally,
the appropriate acid diluent for total recoverable elements in solid samples is 2% HNO 3 and 2%
HCl. The reason for these different diluents is to match the types of acids and the acid
concentrations of the samples with the acid present in the standards and blanks.
7.5 BLANKS - Two types of blanks are required for this method. A calibration blank is used to
establish the analytical calibration curve and the laboratory reagent blank (LRB) is used to assess
possible contamination from the sample preparation procedure and to assess spectral background.
All diluent acids should be made from concentrated acids (Sects. 7.1.1, 7.1.4) and ASTM type I water.
7.5.1 Calibration blank - Consists of the appropriate acid diluent (Sect. 7.4 note) (HCJ/HNOs) in
ASTM type I water.
7.5.2 Laboratory reagent blank (preparation blank) must contain all the reagents in the same
volumes as used in processing the samples. The preparation blank must be earned through the entire
sample digestion and preparation scheme.
7.6 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLE - Quality control samples are available from various
sources. Dilute (with the appropriate acid (HCl/HNOs) blank solution) an appropriate aliquot of
analyte such that the resulting solution will result in an absorbance of approximately 0.1.
7.7 LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANK - To an aliquot of laboratory reagent blank, add an
aliquot of the stock standard to provide a final concentration which will produce an absorbance of
approximately 0.1 for the analyte. The fortified blank must be carried through the entire sample
digestion and preparation scheme.
SAMPLE COLLECTION PRESERVATION AND STORAGE
8.1 Prior to sample collection, consideration should be given to the type of data required so that
appropriate preservation and pretreatment steps can be taken. Filtration, acid preservation etc.
should be performed at the time of sample collection or as soon thereafter as practically possible.
8,2 For the determination of dissolved elements, the sample should be filtered through a 0.45-
|a.m membrane filter. Use a portion of the sample to rinse the filter assembly, discard and then collect
E-123
-------
the required volume of filtrate. Acidify the filtrate with (1 +1) nitric acid immediately following
filtration to a pH of less than two.
8.3 For the determination of total recoverable elements in aqueous samples, acidify wi th (1+1)
nitric acid at the time of collection to a pH of less than two. The sample should not be filtered prior
to analysis.
NOTE: Samples that cannot be acid preserved at die time of collection because of sampling
limitations or transport restrictions, should be acidified with nitric acid to pH <2 upon receipt in the
laboratory (normally, 3 mL of (1 +1) nitric acid per liter of sample is sufficient for most ambient and
drinking water samples). Following acidification, the sample should be held for a minimum of 16 h
before withdrawing an aliquot for sample processing.
8.4 Solid samples usually require no preservation prior to analysis other dian storage at 4 °C.
CALIBRATIONAND STANDARDIZATION
9.1 CALIBRATION - Demonstration and documentation of acceptable initial calibration is
required before any samples are analyzed and is required periodically throughout sample analysis as
dictated by results of continuing calibration checks. After initial calibration is successful, a calibration
check is required at the beginning of each period during which analyses are performed.
9.1.1 Initiate proper operating configuration of instrument and data system. Allow a period of
not less than 30 min for the instrument to warm up if an EDL is to be used.
9.1.2 Instrument stability must be demonstrated by analyzing a standard solution of a
concentration 20 times the IDL a minimum of five times with die resulting relative standard
deviation of absorbance signals less than 5%.
9.1.3 Initial calibration. The instrument must be calibrated for the analyte to be determined using
the calibration blank (Sect. 7.5.1) and calibration standards prepared at three or more concentration
levels widiin the linear dynamic range of the analyte.
9.2 INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE - Check the performance of the instrument and
verify the calibration using data gathered from analyses of calibration blanks, calibration standards
and the quality control sample.
9.2.1 After the calibration has been established, it must be initially verified for the analyte by
analyzing the QCS (Sect. 7.6). If measurements exceed ±10% of the established QCS value, the
analysis should be terminated, the source of the problem identified and corrected, the instrument
recalibrated, and the new calibration must be verified before continuing analyses.
9.2.2 To verify that the instrument is properly calibrated on a continuing basis, analyze the
calibration blank and an intermediate concentration calibration standard as surrogate samples after
every ten analyses. The results of the analyses of the standard will indicate whether the calibration
remains valid. If the indicated concentration of any analyte deviates from the true concentration by
more than 10%, die instrument must be recalibrated and die response of the QCS checked as in Sect.
9.2.1. After the QCS sample has met specifications, die previous ten samples must be reanalyzed in
groups of five with an intermediate concentration calibration standard analyzed after every fifth
sample. If the intermediate concentration calibration standard is found to deviate by more dian 10%,
the analyst is instructed to identify the source of instrumental drift.
E-124
-------
NOTE: If the sample matrix is responsible for the calibration drift and/or the sample matrix is
affecting analyte response, it may be necessary to perform standard additions in order to assess an
analyte concentration (Sect. 11.5).
QUALITY CONTROL (QC)
10.1 FORMAL QUALITY CONTROL - The minimum requirements of this QC program
consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability, and the analysis of laboratory reagent
blanks and fortified blanks and samples as a continuing check on performance. The laboratory is
required to maintain performance records that define the quality of the data thus generated.
10.2 INITIAL DEMONSTRATION OF PERFORMANCE
10.2.1 The initial demonstration of performance is used to characterize instrument performance
(MDLs and linear calibration ranges) for analyses conducted by this method.
10.2.2 Method detection limits (MDL) - The method detection limit should be established for
the analyte, using reagent water (blank) fortified at a concentration of two to five times the estimated
detection limits. To determine MDL values, take seven replicate aliquots of the fortified reagent
water and process through the entire analytical method. Perform all calculations defined in the
method and report the concentration values in die appropriate units. Calculate the MDL as follows:
MDL= (t) x (S)
where, t - Student's t value for a 99% confidence level and a standard deviation estimate wim n -
1 degrees of freedom [t = 3.14 for seven replicates],
S = standard deviation of the replicate analyses.
Method detection limits should be determined every six months or whenever a significant
change in background or instrument response is expected.
10.2.3 Linear calibration ranges - Linear calibration ranges are metal dependent. The upper limit
of the linear calibration range should be established by determining the signal responses from a
minimum of four different concentration standards, one of which is close to the upper limit of the
linear range. The linear calibration range which may be used for the analysis of samples should be
judged by the analyst from the resulting data. Linear calibration ranges should be determined every
six months or whenever a significant change in instrument response maybe expected.
10.3 ASSESSING LABORATORY PERFORMANCE - REAGENT AND FORTIFIED
BLANKS
10.3.1 Laboratory reagent blank (LRB) - The laboratory must analyze at least one LRB (Sect.
7.5.2) with each set of samples. Reagent blank data are used to assess contamination from the
laboratory environment and to characterize spectral background from the reagents used in sample
processing. If an analyte value in the reagent blank exceeds its determined MDL, then laboratory or
reagent contamination should be suspected. Any determined source of contamination should be
corrected and the samples reanalyzed.
10.3.2 Laboratory fortified blank (LFB) - The laboratory must analyze at least one LFB (Sect.
7.7) with each set of samples. Calculate accuracy as percent recovery (Sea. 10.4.2). If the recovery of
any analyte falls outside the control limits (Sect. 10.3.3), that analyte is judged out of control, and the
source of the problem should be identified and resolved before continuing analyses.
E-125
-------
10.3.3 Until sufficient data (usually a minimum of 20 to 30 analyses) become available, a
laboratory should assess laboratory performance against recovery limits of 80- 120%. When sufficient
internal performance data become available, develop control limits from the percent mean recovery
(x) and the standard deviation (S) of the mean recovery. These data are used to establish upper and
lower control limits as follows:
UPPER CONTROL LIMIT = x + 3S
LOWER CONTROL LIMIT =x - 3S
After each 5-10 new recovery measurements, new control limits should be calculated using only
the most recent 20 to 30 data points.
10.4 ASSESSING ANALYTE RECOVERY - LABORATORY FORTIFIED SAMPLE
MATRIX
10.4.1 The laboratory must fortify a minimum of 10% of the samples or one fortified sample per
set, whichever is greater. Ideally for solid samples, the concentration added should be approximately
equal to 0.1 abs units after the solution has been diluted. In other words if the sample (after dilution)
results in an absorbance of 0.05, ideally the laboratory fortified sample wil 1 result in an absorbance
of 0.150 (after dilution). Over time, samples from all routine sample sources should be fortified.
10.4.2 Calculate the percent recovery for the analyte, corrected for background concentrations
measured in the unfortified sample, and compare these values to the control limits established in
Sect. 10.3.3 for the analyses of LFBs. Fortified recovery calculations are not required if the fortified
concentration is less than 10% of the sample background concentration. Percent recovery may be
calculated in units appropriate to the matrix, using the following equation:
R = [(Cs-C)/S]xlOO
where,
R = percent recovery.
Cs = fortified sample concentration.
C = sample background concentration.
S = concentration equivalent of the fortified sample.
10.4.3 If the recovery of the analyte on the fortrfied sample falls outside the designated range,
and the laboratory performance on the LFB for the analyte is shown to be in control (Sect. 10.3) the
recovery problem encountered with the fortified sample is judged to be matrix related (Sect. 4), not
system related. The data obtained for that analyte should be verified with the methods of standard
additions (Sect. 11.5).
10.5 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES (QCS) - Each quarter, the laboratory should analyze
one or more QCS (if available). If criteria provided with the QCS are not met, corrective action
should be taken and documented.
E-126
-------
PROCEDURE
SAMPLE PREPARATION - DISSOLVED ELEMENTS
11.1.1 For the determination of dissolved elements in drinking water, wastewater, ground and
surface waters, take a 50-mL(± 1 mL) aliquot of the filtered acid preserved sample, and add 1 mL of
concentrated nitric acid. The sample is now ready for analysis. Allowance should be made in the
calculations for the appropriate dilution factors.
NOTE: If a precipitate is formed during acidification, transport or storage, the sample aliquot
must be treated using the procedure in Sect. 11.2.1 prior to analysis.
SAMPLE PREPARA TION - TOTAL RECOVERABLE ELEMENTS.
11.2.1 For the determination of total recoverable elements in water or waste water, take a 50-mL
(± 1 mL) aliquot from a well mixed, acid preserved sample and transfer it to a Teflon microwave
digestion vessel Add 1 mL of concentrated HNOj. Seal the vessel per the manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE: Microwave digestion requires the use of a program that has been verified for a particular
sample type. Please insure that Dr. Farmer has approved any new programs. After digestion, the
sample is now ready for analysis. Prior to the analysis of samples the calibration standards must be
analyzed and the calibration verified using a QC sample (Sect. 9). Once the calibration has been
verified, the instrument is ready for sample analysis. Because the effects of various matnces on the
stability of diluted samples cannot be characterized, samples should be analyzed as soon as possible
after preparation.
11.2.2 For the determination of total extractable elements in solid samples (sludge, soils, and
sediments), mix the sample thoroughly to achieve homogeneity and weigh accurately a 0.5 ±0.01g
portion of the sample. Transfer to a Teflon microwave digestion vessel. Add 45 mL RO water
followed by 1 mL nitric acid. Digest as with a liquid sample
NOTE: Determine the percent solids in the sample for use in calculations and for reporting data
on a dry weight basis.
11.2.3 Appropriate digestion procedures for biological tissues should be utilized prior to sample
analysis.
11.3 For every new or unusual matrix, it is highly recommended that an inductively coupled
plasma atomic emission spectrometer be used to screen for high element concentrations.
Information gained from this may be used to prevent potential damage of the instrument and better
estimate which elements may require analysis by graphite furnace.
11.4 Samples having concentrations higher than the established linear dynamic range should be
diluted into range and re-analyzed. If methods of standard additions are required, follow the
instructions in Sea. 11.5.
11.5 STANDARD ADDITIONS - If methods of standard addition are required, the following
procedure is recommended.
11.5.1 The standard addition technique4 involves preparing new standards in the sample matrix
by adding known amounts of standard to one or more aliquots of the processed sample solution.
This technique compensates for a sample constituent that enhances or depresses the analyte signal
thus producing a different slope from that of the calibration standards. It will not correct for additive
interference which causes a baseline shift. The simplest version of this technique is the single-
E-127
-------
addition method. The procedure is as follows. Two identical aliquots of the sample solution, each of
volume Vx are taken. To the first (labeled A) is added a small volume Vs of a standard anahte
solution of concentration Cs. To the second (labeled B) is added the same volume Vs of the solvent.
The analytical signals of A and B are measured and corrected for nonanalyte signals. The unknown
sample concentration Cx is calculated:
Q = SBVsCs/(SA-SB)Vx
where SA and SB are the analytical signals (corrected for the blank) of solutions A and B,
respectively. Vs and Cs. should be chosen so that SA is roughly twice SB on die average. It is best if Vs
is made much less than Vx and thus Cs. is much greater than Cx to avoid excess dilution of the
sample matrix. If a separation or concentration step is used, the additions are best made first and
carried through the entire procedure. For the results from diis technique to be valid, the following
limitations must be taken into consideration:
1. The analytical curve must be linear.
2. The chemical form of the anaryte added must respond the same as the analyte in the sample.
3. The interference effect must be constant over the working range of concern.
4. The signal must be corrected for any additive interference.
CALCULATIONS
12.1 Do not report element concentrations below the determined MDL.
12.2 For aqueous samples prepared by total recoverable procedure (Sect.ll.2.l), multiply
solution concentrations by the appropriate dilution factor. Round the data to die tenths place and
report the data in M.g/L with up to three significant figures.
12.3 For solid samples prepared by total recoverable procedure (Sect.11.2.2) round the solution
concentration (|^g/L in the analysis solution) to the tenths place and multiply by the dilution factor.
Data should be reported to a tenth mg/kg up to three significant figures taking into account the
percent solids if the data are reported on a dry weight basis.
The dry weight should be determined on a separate sample aliquot if die sample is available. The
dry weight can be determined by transferring a uniform 1-g aliquot to an evaporating dish and drying
die sample to a constant weight at 103-105°C.
12.4 If additional dilutions were performed, the appropriate dilution factor must be applied to
sample values.
12.5 The QC data obtained during the analyses provide an indication of the quality of die sample
data and should be provided with die sample results.
PRECISION AND ACCURACY
13.1 Instrument operating conditions used for single laboratory testing of the method andMDLs
are listed in Table 3.
13.2 Data obtained from single laboratory testing of the method are summarized in Table 2A-C
for tiiree solid samples consisting of SRM 1645 River Sediment, EPA Hazardous Soil and EPA
Electroplating Sludge. Samples ware prepared using the procedure described in Sect. 11.2.2 of the
E-128
-------
EPA METHOD. For each matrix, five replicates were analyzed and an average of the replicates used
for determining die sample background concentration. Two further pairs of duplicates were fortified
at different concentration levels. The sample background concentration, mean spike percent
recovery, the standard deviation of the average percent recovery and the relative percent difference
between the duplicate fortified determinations are listed in Table 2A-C. In addition, Table 2D-F
contains a si ngle laboratory testing of the method in aqueous media including drinking water, pond
water and well water. Samples were prepared using the procedure described in Sect. 11.2.1. For each
aqueous matrix, five replicates were analyzed and an average of the replicates used for determining
the sample background concentration. Four samples were fortified at the levels reported in Table
2D-F. A percent relative standard deviation is reported in Table 2D-F for the fortified samples. An
average percent recovery is also reported in Tables 2D-F.
Precision and recovery for NBS River Sediment 1645
Solid Certified Value Avg. Sed %RSD Avg % Rec S (r) RPD Avg % S (r) RPD
Sample Cone (mg/kg) (20 Rec
mg/kg)x (100
mg/kg)
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
10.2
29600
109
10.8
32800
132
3.7
1.6 99.1
4.8
110.7 0.7 1.7
14.2 0 - -
111.5 3.6 2.6
Precisian and recovery far EPA Hazardous Soil 884
Solid Sample Avg. Sed Cone %RSD Avg % Rec (20 S (r) RPD Avg % Rec (100 S (r) RPD
(mg/kg) . mg/kg)" mg/kg)«
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
1.8
84.0
127
10.3
4.2
4.3
115.4
95.5
108.0
0.8
33.8
15.2
1.4
17.9
2.6
99.0
120.8
117.7
4.3
6.6
5.4
12.1
8.9
5.7
E-129
-------
Precision and recovery data for EPA Electroplating Sludge 286
Solid Sample
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Avg. Sed Cone
(mg/kg)
119
8070
887
%RSD
1.3
4.5
1.6
Avg % Rec (20
mg/kg)"
81.9
*
*
S (r) RPD Avg % Rec (100
mg/kg)11
7.9 3.0 112.5
*
99.5
S(r)
3.9
-
21.9
RPD
4.7
-
6.0
%RSD percent relative standard deviation (n=5)
S (r) standard deviation of average percent recovery
RPD relative percent difference between duplicate recovery determinations
* fortified concentration < 10% of sample concentration
not determined
x fortified concentration
Precision and recovery data for Pond Water
Element
Cd
Cr
Cu
Ni
Pb
Avg Cone
(H8/L)
<0.05
0.75
2.98
2.11
1.24
%RSD
K-
8.7
11.2
6.8
20.5
Fortified Cone
(ng/L)
0.5
2.5
10
20
25
%RSD @ Fortified
Cone
4.5
1.8
2.9
1.6
1.8
Avg % Rec
99.1
98.5
101.9
105.6
101.6
E-130
-------
Precision and recovery data for Drinking Water
Element AvgConc %RSD Fortified Cone %RSD @ Fortified Avg % Rec
(ug/L) Cone
Cd <0.05 * 0.5 6.3 105.2
Cr <0.1 * 2.5 3.1 105.7
Cu 2.6 7.3 10 1.2 111.5
Ni 0.8 32.7 20 4.3 103.8
Pb <0.7 * 10 4.0 101.8
Precisian and recovery data for Well Water
Element Avg Cone %RSD Fortified Cone (ug/LJ %RSD @ Fortified Avg % Rec
Cone
Cd 1.8 11.9 0.5 4.6 109.3
Cr <0.1 * 2.5 4.0 102.6
Cu 35.9 1.2 10 0.6 90.2
Ni 11.8 3.2 20 4.0 105.7
Pb <0.7 * 25 0.7 102.2
sample concentration less than established MDL
not determined on sample concentration less than the MDL
Recommended operating conditions
Element
Cd
Cr
Cu
Ni
Pb
Zn
A.
228.8
357.9
324.8
232.0
283.3
213.9
Slit
"0.7" '
0.7
0.7
0.2
0.7
0.7
Char Temp
~"800
1650
1300
1400
1250
700
Atom Temp
1600
2600
2600
2500
2000
1800
MDL
0.05
0.1
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.3
(ug/L)
• "•
MDL determined using a 20 f.tL sample size and stopped flow atomization
E-131
-------
14. REFERENCES
I. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," (ZSCFR 1910), Occupational Safety
and Health Administration, OSHA 2206, revised January, 1976.
2. "Proposed OSHA Safety and Health Standards, Laboratories," Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, Federal Register, July 24, 1986.
3. Code of Federal Regulations 40, Ch. 1, Pt. 136, Appendix B.
4. Winefordner, J.D., "Trace Analysis: Spectroscopic Methods for Elements," Chemical Analysis.
Vol. 46, pp. 41- 42.
5. Waltz, B., G. Schlemmar and J. R. Mudakavi. TAAS. 1988, 3, 695. '
E-132
-------
Attachment 13
ALKALINITY
EPA Method310.1 (Titrimetric, pH4.5)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The method is suitable for all concentration ranges of alkalinity; however, appropriate
aliquots should be used to avoid a titration volume greater than 50 ml.
1.3 Automated titrimetric analysis is equivalent.
Summary of Method
2.1 An unaltered sample is titrated to an electrometrically determined end point of pH 4.5. The
sample must not be filtered, diluted, concentrated, or altered in any way.
Comments
3.1 The sample should be refrigerated at 4°C and run as soon as practical. Do not open sample
bottle before analysis.
3.2 Substances, such as salts of weak organic and inorganic acids present in large amounts, may
cause interference in the electrometnc pH measurements.
3.3 For samples having high concentrations of mineral acids, such as mine wastes and associated
receiving waters, titrate to an electrometnc endpoint of pH 3.9, using the procedure in:
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", p 115, D-1067, Method D, (1976).
3.4 Oil and grease, by coating the pH electrode, may also interfere, causing sluggish response.
Apparatus
4.1 pH meter or electrically operated titrator that uses a glass electrode and can be read to 0.05
pH units. Standardize and calibrate according to manufacturer's instructions. If automatic
temperature compensation is not provided, make titration at 25 ±2° C.
4.2 Use an appropnate sized vessel to keep the air space above the solution a' a minimum. Use a
rubber stopper fitted with holes for the glass electrode, reference electrode (or combination
electrode) and burette.
4.3 Magnetic stirrer, pipettes, flasks and other standard laboratory equipment,
4.4 Burettes, Pyrex 50, 25 and 10 ml.
Reagents
5.1 Sodium carbonate solution, approximately 0.05N: Place 2.5 ±0.2 g (to nearest mg) NaaCC^
(dried at 250°C for 4 hours and cooled in desiccator) into a 1 liter volumetric flask and dilute to the
mark.
E-133
-------
5.2 Standard acid (sulfuric or hydrochloric), 0.1 N: Dilute 3.0 ml cone HiSCu, or 8.3 ml cone
HC1 to 1 liter with distilled water. Standardize versus 40.0 ml of 0.05 N NaiCOs solution with about
60 ml distilled water by titrating potentiometrically to pH of about 5. Lift electrode and rinse into
beaker. Boil solution gently for 3-5 minutes under a watch glass cover. Cool to room temperature.
Rinse cover glass into beaker. Continue titration to the pH inflection point. Calculate normality
using:
(AxB)/(53.00xC)
where:
A = gm NaaCOs weighed into 1 liter
B = ml NaiCOj solution
C = ml acid used to inflection point
5.3 Standard acid (sulfuric or hydrochloric), 0.02 N: Dilute 200.0 ml of 0.1000 N standard acid to
1 liter with distilled water. Standardize by potentiometric titradon of 15.0 ml 0.05N Na 2COj solution
as above.
Procedure
6.1 Sample size
6.1.1 Use a sufficiendy large volume of titrant (> 20 ml in a 50 ml burette) to obtain good
precision while keeping volume low enough to permit sharp end point.
6.1.2 For < 1000 mg CaCO3/l use 0.02N titrant
6.1.3 For > 1000 mg CaCCV 1 use 0.1N titrant
6.1.4 A preliminary titration is helpful.
6.2 Potentiometric titration
6.2.1 Place sample in flask by pipetting widi pipette tip near bottom of flask
6.2.2 Measure pH of sample
6.2.3 Add standard acid (5.2 or 5.3), being careful to stir thoroughly but gently to allow needle to
obtain equilibrium.
6.2.4 Titrate to pH 4.5. Record volume of titrant.
6.3 Potenuometnc titration of low alkalinity
6.3.1 For alkalinity of < 2Q mg/1 titrate 100-200 ml as above (6.2) using a 10 ml micro-burette
and 0.02N acid solution (5.3).
6.3.2 Stop titration at pH in range of 4.3-4.7, record volume and exact pH. Very carefully add
titrant to lower pH exactly 0.3 pH units and record volume.
E-134
-------
Calculations
7.1 Potentiometric titration to pH 4.5
Alkalinity, mg/1 CaCO3 = (A x N x 50,000)7 ml of sample
where:
A = ml standard acid
N = normality standard acid
7.2 Potentiometric titration of low alkalinity:
Total alkalinity, mg/ 1 CaCO3 = (2B-C) x N x 50,000/ml of sample
where:
B = ml titrant to first recorded pH
C = total ml titrant to reach pH 0.3 units lower
N = normality of acid
Precision and Accuracy
8.1 Forty analysts in seventeen laboratories analyzed synthetic water samples containing
increments of bicarbonate, with the following results:
E-135
-------
Alkalinity precision and accuracy
Increment as Alkalinity mg/L,
CaCO3
8
9
113
119
Precision as Standard
Deviation mg/L, CaCC>3
1.27
1.14
5.28
5.36
Accuracy as
Bias, %
+ 10.61
+22.29
-8.19
-7.42
Bias, mg/L,
CaCO3
+0.85
+2.0
-9.3
-8.8
(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses)
8.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL) using surface water samples at an average concentration of 122
mg CaCCb/l, the standard deviation was ± 3.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 278,
Method 403, (1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part31, "Water", p 113, D-1067, Method B, (1976).
E-136
-------
Attachment 14
CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
EPA Method 410.4 (Colorimetric, Automated; Manual)
Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the determination of COD in surface waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The applicable range of the automated method is 3-900 mg/1 and the range of the manual
method is 20 to 900 mg/L.
Summary of Method
2.1 Sample, blanks and standards in sealed tubes are heated in an oven or block digestor in die
presence of dichromate at 150°C. After two hours, the tubes are removed from the oven or digestor,
cooled and measured spectrophotometrically at 600 nm.
Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Collect die samples in glass botdes if possible. Use of plastic containers is permissible if it is
known mat no organic contaminants are present in die containers.
3.2 Samples should be preserved with sulfuric acid to a pH < 2 and maintained at 4°C until
analysis.
Interferences
4.1 Chlorides are quantitatively oxidized by dichromate and represent a positive interference.
Mercuric sulfate is added to the digestion tubes to complex die chlorides.
Apparatus
5.1 Drying oven or block digestor, 150°C
5.2 Coming culture tubes, 16x100 mm or 25x150 mm with Teflon lined screwcap
5.3 Spectrophotometer or Technicon AutoAnalyzer
5.4 Muffle furnace, 500°C.
Reagents
6.1 Digestion solution: Add 10.2 g K.CnO/, 167 ml cone. H2SO4 and 33.3 g HgSO4 to 500 mL of
distilled water, cool and dilute to 1 liter.
6.2 Catalyst solution: Add 22 g AgiSO-t to a 4.09 kg bottle of cone. HiSO-t. Stir until dissolved.
6.3 Sampler wash solution: Add 500 ml of concentrated f^SO.*, to 500 ml of distilled water.
6.4 Stock potassium acid phthalate: Dissolve 0.850 g in 800 ml of distilled water and dilute to 1
liter. 1 mL = 1 mg COD
6.4.1 Prepare a series of standard solutions that cover the expected sample concentrations by
diluting appropriate volumes of die stock standard.
E-137
-------
Procedure
7.1 Wash all culture tubes and screw caps with 20% HiSCu, before their first use to prevent
contamination. Trace contamination may be removed from the tubes by igniting them in a muffle
oven at 500°C for 1 hour.
7.2 Automated
7.2.1 Add 2.5 mL of sample to the 16x100 mm tubes.
7.2.2 Add 1.5 ml of digestion solution (6. 1) and mix.
7.2.3 Add 3.5 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) carefully down die side of the culture tube.
7.2.4 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
7.2.5 Process standards and blanks exacdy as the samples.
7.2.6 Place in oven or block digester at 150°C for two hours.
7.2.7 Cool and place standards in sampler in order of decreasing concentration. Complete filling
sampler tray with unknown samples.
7.2.8 Measure color intensity on AutoAnalyzer at 600 nm.
7.3 Manual
7.3.1 The following procedure may be used if a larger sample is desired or a spectrophotometer
is used in place of an AutoAnalyzer.
7.3.2 Add 10 mL of sample to 25x150 mm culture tube.
7.3.3 Add 6 ml of digestion solution (6. 1) and mix.
7.3.4 Add 14 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) down the side of culture tube.
7.3.5 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
7.3.6 Place in oven or block digestor at 150°C for 2 hours.
7.3.7 Cool, allow any precipitate to settle and measure intensity in spectrophotometer at 600 nm.
Use only optically matched culture tubes or a single cell for spectrophotometric measurement.
Calculation
8. 1 Prepare a standard curve by plotting peak height or percent transmittance against known
concentrations of standards.
8.2 Compute concentration of samples by comparing sample response to standard curve.
Precision and Accuracy
9. 1 Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
E-138
-------
Bibliography
1. Jirka, A. M., and M. J. Garter, "Micro-Semi-Automated Analysis of Surface and Wastewaters
for Chemical Oxygen Demand." Anal. Chem. 47:1397. (1975).
E-139
-------
Attachment 15
Sample Flowcharts
E-140
-------
MCTT Evaluation Flow Chart
16 L sample from
2.5 L sample |
j 7.5 L sample |
filter
I
4^.
Amber glass 500 mL
HDPE 500 mL
1
Method mL
EPA 4 10.4..... 10
UAB 608 &
UAB 625... 315
UAB pi o*.. ,.lu
TotaL..........,.....33S
Method
EPA 110.3.
EPA 120.1.
EPA 130.2.
EPA 150.1.
EPA 160.1.
EPA 160.4.
BPA180.1.
mL
....25
....70
..100
....25
..100
..100
•jt-ftft ".
t*tyw
HDPE 500 mL
1 raL 6M HNOj
1
Method jriL
EPA 200.9......70
Total ....70
5.5 L of sample
to storage for
filter media tests
Amber glass 500 mL
1
Method mfc
UAB 608 &
UAB 625 .......315
TotaL«... ...........515
Amber glass 500 mL
1
Method mL
EPA 3 10.1... 50
EPA410.4..... Jfl
UAB itTox.. ..10
."• ' • . . , '
Total........»........70
MDPE500mL
1
Metiiod mL
EPA 1 10.3 25
JBPA 120.1 70
,EPA 150.1.....25
BPA 16Q 3 100
tSftjL \£A A *fifV
ilSmt IW.4...JUO
ODA 19A 1 1A
CrA lot/. i..,,.JrU
UAB PS. 10
Total 360
HDPE 500 mL
ImLoMHNCV
1
Method rttL
EPA 200.9.....70
TotaL..^.. .70
-------
Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart
Composite of stored unfittered runoff from MC
(25-30 L)
10 filtration media fabric columns
6 media, 3 fabrics, 1 blank 24.5L
|
While grabs not taken, excess filtrate
collected in 8L HDPE container. Total
collected per column per filtration app 2 L
for a total of app 20 L (app 2L per 8L
HDPE jug). Each jug split as follows:
^**
**•
TT
grab samples
,2 per
column 500 mL HDPE
1
split
•**•*
\
@ lOmin
Method mL
EPA 11 0,3 25
EPA 120.1. .,..70
EPA 130.2...100
EPA 150.1.....25
EPA 180.1 30
EPA 410.4,.,,. 10
UAB PS 10
UABnTox 10
T«*~l ton
@45min
Method mL
EPA110,3....,25
EPA 120.1 70
EPA 130.2...100
EPA 150.1.....25
EPA 180.1 30
EPA410.4_JO
UAB PS......,.,10
UAB jiTox..;.,10
500 mL HDPE
Method mL
EPA 110.3 25
EPA 120.1 70
EPA 130.2...100
EPA 150.1...;.25
EPA 180.1.....30
EPA410.4..;..10
UAB PS ...10
UAB uTox 10
Total...-. — 280
Amber glass 500 mL
Method mL
EPA 410.4 10
UAB 608 &
UAB 625 :....315
UABjtTox. 10
Total... 335
HDPE 500 mL
ethod mL
EPA 110.3 25
EPA 120.1 70
EPA 150.1 25
EPA 160.L..100
EPA 160.4...100
EPA 180.1 30
UAB 300 ,25
Total ..375
HDPE 500 mL
-1 mL 6M HNO3
mL
EPA 200,9 /...JO
Total 1...70
Amber glass 500 mL
mL
SPA 3 10.1... ...... 50
EPA410A..,.,.;.10
UAB 608 &
UAB 625;, ....... 315
Total --------- .~.
HOPE 500 mL
_ iaL-
EPA110.3..,..25
EPA 120.1.,.:.70,
EPA 130.2...100
EPA 150.1,..,.25
EPA 160.3...1QO
EPA 160.4... 100
EPA 180,1.....30
UAB PS.........10
HDPE 500 mL
mL
*»•****•** 'v
-------
On-Site Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart
Storm water from settling chamber, settled for min 5 days, 150 L
split into 10 columns (7 media, 2 fabric, 1 blank), 8 L collected per
column
filter
l^puTI
Amber glass 500
mL
3.5 L of sample
to storage for
filter media tests
HOPE 500 mL
Method
EPA 410.4.
UAB 608 &
UAB 625....
UAB uTox
UABUVvis
liotaL.........
mL
10
.315
. ..10
10
........345
Method mL
EPA110.3.....25
EPA 12D.L....70
EPA 130.7... 100
EPA 150.1.....25
EPA 160.1...IOO
EPA 160.4... 100
EPA 180.1 30
Totat..~.^w450
Method
EPA 200 9
Tnfat
mL
70
7ft
HOPE 500 mL
+lmL6M
UAB 608 &
UAB 625.... .315
Total.................315
BPA310.L....50
EPA 410.4;.,.. 10
UAB jiToX.:»,ta
Method mjL
EPA 1HK3.....25
EPA 120.1.. ...70
EPA 150.1.....25
EPA 160.3...10J5
EPA 160.4...100
EPA 180.1....JO
UABPS.........10
Total ..360
EPA 200.9.....70
-------
Bench Scale Filtration Media Evaluation Flow Chart
Stormwater from settling chamber; well-mixed, 150 L
passed through 7 columns (6 media, 1 blank)
I
6-500 mL samples collected (amber glass) per column
I
Each 500 mL sample is split as follows;
Amber 500 mL glass.
Method
EPA 160.3
EPA 410.4
EPA 180.1
EPA 120.1
EPA 110.3
EPA 150.1
EPA 130.2
UAB PS
UAB uTox....:..
UAB UVvis
Total
mL
100
........IQ
30
70
25
........25
........10
10
10
390
HDPElOOmL
0.5mL6M«NO3
Method
EPA 200.9....
mL
70
»,**-•**-**-»/*}
E-144
-------
United States
Environmental Protection Agency
Center for Environmental Research Information
Cincinnati, OH 45268
Please make all necessary changes on the below label,
detach or copy, and return to the address in the upper
left-hand comer.
If you do not wish to receive these reports CHECK HERE D;
detach, or copy this cover, and return to the address in the
upper left-hand corner.
PRESORTED STANDARD
POSTAGE & FEES PAID
EPA
PERMIT No. G-35
Official Business
Penalty for Private Use
$300
EPA/600/R-99/017
-------